<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Michaelp</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Michaelp"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/Special:Contributions/Michaelp"/>
	<updated>2026-04-09T04:28:02Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/csvloaderror&amp;diff=80803</id>
		<title>error/moodle/csvloaderror</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=error/moodle/csvloaderror&amp;diff=80803"/>
		<updated>2011-01-25T15:52:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Unfortunately the module which loads the csv data doesn&#039;t explain what is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Check&lt;br /&gt;
## First line must contain column headings SPELLED correctly&lt;br /&gt;
## There should not be quotes (i.e. &amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
## There should not be a trailing comma (i.e. ,)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While you&#039;re here, contrary to popular belief, usernames must be in lowercase in the file to be uploaded.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Development:Import_from_Book_mod&amp;diff=49172</id>
		<title>Development:Import from Book mod</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Development:Import_from_Book_mod&amp;diff=49172"/>
		<updated>2009-01-21T22:58:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: New page: DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT  Both Lesson and Book provide a means to navigate through a package of content via next/previous page links and a left hand menu of pages. In order to reduce the duplicat...&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;DRAFT DRAFT DRAFT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both Lesson and Book provide a means to navigate through a package of content via next/previous page links and a left hand menu of pages. In order to reduce the duplication of these two modules, Lesson will have several features added from Book module. In order to import content from Book modules into Lesson, Lesson will support the import of IMS Content Packages from Book. IMS CP import will also enable the of use of content from many sources as the basis for Moodle Lessons. IMS CP import will replace the current Powerpoint import function - which has been unreliable due to various changes made in Powerpoint&#039;s HTML export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==IMS CP Import==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will provide a tab for importing IMS CP files similar to the current tab for importing Powerpoint files (upload/browse button, success/error reporting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IMS CP is a structured format with a defined navigation defined in an XML file - this navigational structure will be imported to Lesson as a sequential series of Lesson pages. Once the page structure is created in Lesson, the pages can be moved around, used with checkpoints and question pages, and otherwise function as regular branch table pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Possible uses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Content can be exported from Book modules versions that support IMS CP export and imported into Moodle Lessons.&lt;br /&gt;
* Content may be importable from other IMS CP files (non-Book module) directly or with minor updates to the IMS CP XML.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Changes to the lesson module===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a quick list of the changes that would take place if Check Points were implemented:&lt;br /&gt;
*Powerpoint import function removed.&lt;br /&gt;
*IMS CP function created instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Advantages===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Primary:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*IMS Content Package is a standard format used by many content authoring tools&lt;br /&gt;
*IMS CP is a standardized format with a navigational structure defined by an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Gives a defined, standard method for importing content packages into Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Disadvantages===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Lesson users will have to learn a new way to &lt;br /&gt;
*Migration to the use of Check Points would require Lesson users to redefine their lesson&#039;s navigation.  Although, some aspects of the navigation can be migrated automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
*Lesson question will strictly be used for grading, no customized jumps depending upon a specific answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Conclusion===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check Points would provide a simplification to the design of the lesson yet allow for more advanced learning experiences.  A simple example would be if a student is answering all or most of the questions correctly, then the lesson could adapt to a harder set of questions in order to challenge the student (Adaptive Learning).  Also Check Points appear to solve the support problem by centralizing the navigation at both the user level and at the code base level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Author==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[User:Michael Penney|Michael Penney]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Development:Lesson Specification]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Developer|New lesson import]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Development:Lesson_2.0&amp;diff=49073</id>
		<title>Development:Lesson 2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Development:Lesson_2.0&amp;diff=49073"/>
		<updated>2009-01-21T00:24:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Import/export functions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Moodle 2.0}}Plans for Lesson in Moodle 2.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Using question database==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Development:Adding question types to lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Improve usability==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Development:New_lesson_navigation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import/export functions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import from Book mod]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Export to IMS Package (SCORM?)&lt;br /&gt;
* Better support for printing&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=29624</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=29624"/>
		<updated>2007-12-01T04:34:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Grading */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; can deliver content in interesting and flexible ways. It consists of a number of pages. Each page has content and leads to another page. On any page, students can be given choices which determine the next page or be given no choice about what they see next.  Question and branch table pages are the two most common types. A question page has content which usually ends with a question and shows a number of possible answers. The student&#039;s choice can be graded and determines the next page that appears. Branch tables are another type of page where students see content. The teacher can place labelled buttons below the content that students choose to move to a specific page or part of the lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson presents information in a structure that is determined by the teacher. The lesson material is broken into small chunks. These chunks are called pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson can create a series of pages which can be presented in a linear fashion, like a slide show, or in a non-linear, branching manner, or a combination of the two.  A student&#039;s choice will send them to any page that the teacher selects.  For example, a particular answer might send the student back in the lesson for a review, while another answer will advance the student to a new page.  The lesson can be graded with the use of questions, or ungraded and used simply as a resource of pages or a combination of both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two basic modes: presentation and flash card.  Most of the descriptions of a lesson in this document are about the presentation mode and the use of questions.   The Flash Card section describes how to make lesson pages appear randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Presentation Lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson activity includes many features to make a [[Page content|page&#039;s content]] and the entire lesson interesting. There are tools to assist the teacher with pictures, links, fonts, tables and other graphics, plus a rich [[HTML editor]]. It also can keep students from straying from the lesson plan by password protection, various time limits and dependency on a previous lesson&#039;s activity.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
A [[Lesson_Pages|lesson is made up of pages]]. There are two basic types of Lesson pages: choice and navigation. The choice pages,  [[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|&amp;quot;Branch Tables&amp;quot;]] or [[Lesson#Types_of_questions_available_within_a_lesson|Question pages]] are the most common. Branch tables are for delivering content and can provide links to one or more other pages in the lesson. Each question page can do the same but also give an individual response and an individual score for each choice (the student&#039;s answer).  The teacher decides upon the page type and how to best use its flexibility to achieve educational goals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the default lesson question is a multiple choice page. The teacher might place content on the page and ask a question about it.  The teacher can provide 1 to 20 answers, where each answer is scored differently and takes the student to a different part of the lesson. On some answers, the teacher may decide to provide some explanation before sending the student along.  Unlike a piece of paper, the answers are going to re arrange themselves every time the student enters the question page.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course the teacher can decide a more simple approach in constructing a page or a Lesson. For example, they don&#039;t need to provide any choices,  Lesson will add a continue button for their students to link to the next page.  Or Lesson can provide a standard response for correct and wrong answers, when the teacher doesn&#039;t provide one.  Or Lesson can determine a score automatically by where the teacher sends the student.  The teacher can turn off the scoring function for the entire lesson or decide not to ask a question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material or the personal style of the teacher. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is easily understood by their learners and which builds in a logical and progressive way. Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add different kinds of pages to any position within the lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher (editing a lesson) sees the pages in what is called the &#039;&#039;[[Logical Page Order|logical order]]&#039;&#039;.  The students see the lesson in the &#039;&#039;[[Navigation Page Order|navigation order]]&#039;&#039;.  The default navigation order is the logical order, when no other direction has been entered by the teacher. Generally speaking, the logical order is used the most.  However, it is possible to create a more complicated path to meet the needs of students or the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A page feature called [[Jumps]] determines what a student sees next. For example, each different answer to a question, might send the student to a different page. There are two types of jumps, &#039;&#039;relative&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;absolute&#039;&#039;. The default jumps used by most pages are the &#039;&#039;relative&#039;&#039; jumps &amp;quot;Next Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;This Page&amp;quot;.  For example, the destination of the Next Page jump is always the next page in the logical order of the lesson. An &#039;&#039;absolute&#039;&#039; jump sends the student to a specific page (identified by the page title).  A pull down list of possible jumps assist the teacher in being creative. Thus jumps allow the teacher to design a lesson for the students with &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using several preview tools.  For example there is a [[Viewing_a_lesson#When_the_lesson_already_has_content:|Preview tab]] for the teacher when they open a lesson and there is also a preview icon associated with each page.  It is possible for the Teacher to switch their role in the course to that of a student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct [[Answers|answer]] and several wrong answers, the familiar multiple choice question. Each answer can receive an individual response from the teacher before sending the student (with a jump setting) to view the same or another page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As will be seen later, there are two ways to grade a lesson. In one method, the direction students are sent in the logical order of pages determines if the answer was correct or wrong for grading purposes. Usually a correct answer advances the student in the logical order and wrong answers send the students back to the question page or back in the logical order. The other method uses an answer&#039;s score to calculate the grade. Usually a correct answer receives a score of 1, any wrong answer receive a score 0. It is possible to give a negative score or partial credit for any answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a question page is added, the jumps have a default setting. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page and it is a good practice to keep this as a right answer. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. The score for the first answer is 1 and for the rest 0. These settings can be changed by editing the question. Remember the order of the answers is going to be random each time a student enters the question page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then each answer has a point value associated with it. Next we will discuss grading a student&#039;s lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson than can be part of the [[Grades|gradebook]]. There is a section in the Lesson settings for [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Grade_Options| grading options]]. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It is the number of correct answers divided by the number of question pages seen. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Custom_Scoring|Custom Scoring]] is selected in the Lesson settings, then the grading algorithm changes.  Instead of the above, the grade is based on earned points by the user, which is divided by the total points possible. The teacher can assign a score for each response, this can be a negative or 0 (zero) or a positive number.  Usually the score is 0 for a wrong answer and 1 for a correct answer.  The point values associated with each of the user&#039;s answers are added up. That is then divided by the total of the maximum points that the user could have earned for each page answered. This number is then scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grade is computed when the Lesson is completed.   A completed lesson usually means the student has viewed every page, or answered every question or is directed by a jump to &amp;quot;end of lesson&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in the previous viewings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some instructors use Lessons as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Many instructors use lessons to get across chunks of knowledge. The grading options enable instructors to utilize the [http://www.wcln.org/Flow_Documentation.htm#The_Practice_Principle &amp;quot;Practice Principle&amp;quot;] of eLearning, in which immediate practice in answering questions about content leads to improved retention and understanding of the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{secstub}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling student review will override custom feedback for questions. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=70798]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allowing a student to re take a lesson is the default lesson setting under([[Adding/editing_a_lesson#User_can_re-take|grade options]]). Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their [[Student_tutorials#Settings|activity page]]). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some learning environments, the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to &amp;quot;No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter content into the first page. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages in front or after that page.  Once a question or branch page have been created, they can be edited by the teacher at any time.  When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher also has the option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson will normally cover a limited amount of material. A topic or week might contain many lessons. Lessons are shown to the student in the home page for the course within &amp;quot;weeks&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;topics&amp;quot;, and/or in the activity block when it is part of the course home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with any lesson, it is a good idea to have a plan before starting the presentation.   Simple lessons that basically go from the start to the end in a straight line path, one page after the other, can be created from an outline. More complicated lessons require more planning.  The good news is that a teacher can create a simple lesson and then based upon feedback and performance,  can add refinements or complexity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_question_page]]- more help on adding question pages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_branch_table]] - more help on adding branch pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}} [[Image:Question_type_tabs.GIF]]  &lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice ===&lt;br /&gt;
In a multiple choice question, the student is given a question and a list of answers.  Moodle can shuffle the answer list every time the question is view by a student. In a multiple choice question, the student selects one answer.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can use pictures.   Indeed, pictures can be used as answers when the HTML editor is turned on and the page reloaded.   Each answer in a multichoice question can be scored separately.  It is possible to give a negative score for an answer, or partial credit for a wrong answer. The teacher can give a response based upon the answer selected by the student. &lt;br /&gt;
====With multianswer box checked====&lt;br /&gt;
With the multianswer box checked by the teacher, a multiple choice question has less flexibility for the teacher.  In this type of question, the student selects 1 or more answers from the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a multianswer question is:&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Which of the following are mammals&#039;&#039;&#039;?&lt;br /&gt;
::- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
::- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
::- A fly&lt;br /&gt;
::- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure the multianswer feature works, all correct answers should receive the same score, response and jump to the same page.  The same should be true for every wrong answer.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[Multiple_Choice_question_type]] which is a quiz question and works differently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is expected to answer with one word or a few words. [[Short-Answer question type]] gives more information about this kind of question &lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with Moodle 1.6, there are two different &#039;&#039;student answer&#039;&#039; analysis systems available for the Short Answer type of question in the Lesson Module: the &#039;&#039;&#039;simple system &#039;&#039;&#039; and the  new  &#039;&#039;&#039;regular expressions system&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The simple system is the default and is the same used by the Quiz Module.  There is a &amp;quot;Use Regular Expressions&amp;quot; option box on the Edit Question Page screen in the Lesson Module.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We suggest first reading about the  [[Short-Answer question type|Short answer question page]] with the examples of the &amp;quot;simple analysis&amp;quot;, and then read the [[Short answer analysis]] page that gives more information about &amp;quot;Regular Expression analysis&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question type is a special case of the multiple choice question. The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option. See [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|multiple choice question]] above for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question Matching pulldown 1.JPG||thumb|80px|right|Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions consist of a list of names or statements, or pictures which must be correctly matched against another list. For example &amp;quot;Match the letter with its position in the alphabet.   One list would have A, B, C, D, Z and the other in a pull down menu next to each item would have 2, 4, 3, 1, 26 .   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the &#039;&#039;Multichoice question&#039;&#039; where the choices are shown in a random order, the first list of items in a &#039;&#039;Matching question&#039;&#039; is not shuffled but shown in the same order as entered. The second list is scrambled.  Each match contributes to the question score.  There is no feedback on this type of question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Matching question type]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot;, where 4 is the correct answer. A numerical question will also accept a number in a range as being correct.  The answers are similar to short answer, where the order that the teacher lists the answers is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Numerical question type]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately the lesson numerical question differs from the numerical quiz question and the numerical embedded question (Cloze), in a couple of ways when it evaluates answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions were introduced in Moodle version 1.5. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided. The teacher sees ungraded essay questions when opening the lesson.  After grading, the teacher can email their responses to the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Essay question type]] page has more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into sections that are called [[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|branches]] in Moodle. One way of moving between these branches is by [[Adding_a_branch_table |adding a Branch Table page]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson.  They look similar to question pages. They have a title, [[Page content|content]] section, student choices (called descriptions) and [[Jumps|jumps]] that the student selects. There is no score for a student&#039;s choice, so branch tables are grade neutral.  Branch tables also can be put to special uses by a teacher.  To help understand these concepts we are going to call one use a &amp;quot;ordered branch&amp;quot; and the other a &amp;quot;classic branch&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ordered branches===&lt;br /&gt;
A table of contents is an example of a use of ordered branches. Typically a lesson may start with a [[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|branch table]] with the title &amp;quot;Table of Contents&amp;quot;.  The student selects a Description button and jumps to a page in the logical order that starts a series of pages about that subject.  At the end of an ordered branch, the student is given several options by a question or branch page, such as, go to the next page, the start of the series again, the end of the lesson or return to the Table of Contents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Classic branches===&lt;br /&gt;
*A classic branch introduces random movement within a series of pages that the student nor teacher controls.  A classic branch needs a Branch Table at the start and a special navigation page called &amp;quot;End of Branch&amp;quot; at the end of the series.  The default jump in an &amp;quot;End of Branch&amp;quot; page is the preceding branch table page as an absolute jump. This makes it easy to add  branch pages later in between the start and end and not have to reset the End of Branch jump.  After a classic branch has been created, the teacher will see 3 new relative jump options: &amp;quot;Unseen question within a branch&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Random question within a branch&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Random branch page&amp;quot;.  The classic branch with its &amp;quot;end of branch&amp;quot; navigation page is similar to a [[Clusters|cluster]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Tips when using branches===&lt;br /&gt;
*The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table or a question is set by the lesson setting &amp;quot;[[Adding/editing_a_lesson#The_Maximum_Number_of_Answers_.2F_Branches_in_a_Lesson|Number of Answers/Branches]]&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the &amp;quot;Update this Lesson&amp;quot; button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When a lesson includes one or more ordered or classic branches, teachers need to decide if their students must visit every branch.  By adding a question or two in each branch, the teacher can set the &amp;quot;[[Adding/editing_a_lesson#The_Minimum_Number_of_Questions_in_a_Lesson|Minimum number of Questions]]&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable number of questions that must be answered.  Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade based upon their attempts, not the total number of available questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that using branches may encourage a student to revisit a question page more than once.  This can impact scoring.  Since scores can not be displayed for a teacher, it is a good practice for a new Moodling Teacher to log in as a student to check how the score is kept in their Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|Choice pages gives]] detailed help about editing a branch . [[Adding_a_branch_table|Adding a branch table]] reviews process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment by changing the [[Adding/editing_a_lesson|lesson settings]]. In this kind of lesson, the student is shown pages (cards) in random order.  Usually these are question pages. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a series of cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behavior. A Flow Control option, &amp;quot;After a correct answer&amp;quot; set to [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Action_after_a_Correct_Answer |&amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot;]] never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Number_of_Pages_.28Cards.29_to_Show|&amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot;]] parameter also found in the Flow Control settings. Make sure the number is less than the total number of available pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the Flash Card mode of presentation, setting the jumps is important. A correct answer jump should point to the Next Page, a wrong answer should stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson Flash Card mode is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. And, extra text can be included with each question in the Flash Card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a [[Flashcard_module]] that can be added to a Moodle site.  It is also possible to create lesson segment that is a mini flashcard lesson with the use of special jumps and navigational pages called [[Clusters]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linking and Dependencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
===Dependency===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows this current lesson to be dependent upon a student&#039;s performance in one specific lesson that is in the same course. If the conditions(s) is not met, then the student will not be able to access this lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conditions for the dependency include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Time Spent: the number of minutes the student must spend in the required lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
* Completed: the student must finish the required lesson.   &lt;br /&gt;
* Grade better than: the minimum [[Lesson_score#How_overall_scores_are_determined|overall score]]  as a percentage,  a student must earn in the required lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above can be used if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link to an Activity===&lt;br /&gt;
The drop-down menu contains all of the activities for this course. If one is selected, then a link to that activity will appear at the end of the Lesson along with links to score and course menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other unusual ways to link===&lt;br /&gt;
More advanced Moodlers can figure out how to place HTML links on a lesson page. Thus it is possible to create a link to another lesson/activity, a lesson/activity in another course, or even to a specific page in a lesson.  While this method can be useful, the student may not be able to find their way back to the page with the link.   In general, the links can be created by copying the location of the desired link from the browser&#039;s address bar, then pasting it as a link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://download.moodle.org/docs/using_moodle/ch10_lessons.pdf Using Moodle Chapter 10: Lessons]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://moodle.tokem.fi Http://moodle.tokem.fi] Go to teacher&#039;s manual and select lesson. For versions 1.5.4 and 1.6.4, a good supplement or alternative to MoodleDocs.  Very hands on for specific type of teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Lecciones]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikasgaiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Leçon]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Development:Score_lock&amp;diff=21435</id>
		<title>Development:Score lock</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Development:Score_lock&amp;diff=21435"/>
		<updated>2007-03-17T02:59:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Open Issues */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Administrator]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Developer]]&lt;br /&gt;
by John Gschnaidner&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
This is an advanced version of Activity Locking v2.4. for Moodle 1.6.x but not other versions earlier or later.  Since there are many different version of this hack, I decided to give this new branch a new name:&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Score Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Score Lock will allow you to give students access on activities, resources and complete sections within a course, only after having completed other tasks before that. For example: To get a certificate, the test has to be taken with a minimum result.  &lt;br /&gt;
==Features==&lt;br /&gt;
Already included as in ActivityLocking v2.4:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supports module &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; section locks&lt;br /&gt;
* Parallel locking and completing modules &#039;&#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039;&#039; sections&lt;br /&gt;
* CSS style and checkbox for locking and completing&lt;br /&gt;
* Hide when locked&lt;br /&gt;
* Language support and help&lt;br /&gt;
* Readme for features and installation&lt;br /&gt;
* SQL commands for DB update&lt;br /&gt;
* Info on how to update the CSS style sheets&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New features:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Separate data base table instead of the log&lt;br /&gt;
* Block for deleting students log&lt;br /&gt;
**Delete all logs from course&lt;br /&gt;
**Delete selected (students) logs&lt;br /&gt;
** Allow students to delete their own logs&lt;br /&gt;
* Install &#039;&#039;&#039;and de-install&#039;&#039;&#039; function&lt;br /&gt;
* Source code stored and published for further development&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Current Restrictions:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Score Lock v 1.0 beta installation currently supports only mySQL&lt;br /&gt;
*Backup and restore will be realized in v 1.1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to use Score Lock==&lt;br /&gt;
The Score Lock block adds two tabs to the standard general settings for an activity, resource or section.  These tabs determine the condition for entry and how the lock will appear to the student before and after they enter the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Basic steps===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Score Lock Steps&lt;br /&gt;
!width=&amp;quot;50&amp;quot;| Steps !! Example Course with Score Locks &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
*The teacher must add the Score Lock block to their course (see [[Blocks (teacher)|adding a block]]).&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the activity, a resource or a section by clicking the edit icon [[Image:Edit.gif|20px]] or enter the item&#039;s settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In the example to the right, the teacher can set score lock for either section &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; or resource document &amp;quot;CCC&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Score_lock_Resource_setting_tabs.JPG|Score_lock_Resource_setting_tabs.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the &amp;quot;Lock by Score&amp;quot; tab to set the conditions of the lock&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; tab to set the how the lock will appear to students&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: if you are going to test locks in a course, you can only do that as a student, not as a teacher using the student view button.&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Score Lock Sample Course TeacherView.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &lt;br /&gt;
|Teacher view of Course&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Lock by score&amp;quot; tab===&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Score Lock &amp;quot;Lock by Score&amp;quot; Tab Examples&lt;br /&gt;
! Activity-Resource screen !! Section screen &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Score Lock Requirements Lesson.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Score Lock Requirements Section1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Lesson Lock by score example&lt;br /&gt;
|Topic example&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; tab===&lt;br /&gt;
The settings tab has two parts:  Completion and Locks. In &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; you may adjust, at what condition the module / section is completed plus some settings for visualization of completiton and/or locking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Score Lock Setting Tab Examples&lt;br /&gt;
! Activity-Resource screen !! Section screen &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[image:Score_Lock_Activity-Resource_Settings2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Score Lock Section Settings2.jpg|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Resource example&lt;br /&gt;
|Topic example&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logs===&lt;br /&gt;
Be aware that entry into some modules (resources) will trigger completition of that module. To reset this values, you need to delete the logs (moodle log as well as the Score Lock log). You can do that from the Score Lock block shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Scl_block.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
*First make sure that the option for deleting the Moodle logs is set to Yes (see example below. If it is set to No, the resource will still be counted as completed.&lt;br /&gt;
*Also check your Score Lock settings for this course. Click on the edit icon in the score lock block to access settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;delete&#039; link in the Score Lock block when you want to delete all student logs or specific student logs.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Score Lock block conf.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
Score Lock includes a block, that is used for the first part of the installation: Installing its own tables. Since a part of Score Lock is still a hack, it requires for a modification of other tables and files. This is done in a second step, which is done with a switch in the global settings of the block. This will add to existing tables, backup your existing files and install the modified Score Lock files. Even if the installation (de-installation) should fail, you will be able to recover to your original moodle files. The remaining table adds will cause no problem, but will have to be deleted previous to a new installation.&lt;br /&gt;
===Download and Forum===&lt;br /&gt;
*You can download the actual version of Score Lock from here: [http://moodle.org/file.php/5/moddata/forum/678/255250/ScoreLock_v103beta.tgz ScoreLock_v103beta]&lt;br /&gt;
:The current version is 1.0.3 which is compatible with Moodle 1.6.1 and 1.6.2&lt;br /&gt;
*If you need assistance or found a problem or a bug please post it here: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=54195#247088 Conditional Activities Forum thread: Score Lock v 1.0 ]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step by step===&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Part 1: Block Installation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Unpack the ScoreLock file&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy the content of the moodle folder into your moodle folder.&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional you may copy moodledata to your moodle data folder (contains german language files)&lt;br /&gt;
*Log in to your moodle site as administrator and access administration&lt;br /&gt;
*You should get a message of two tables to be installed&lt;br /&gt;
*If you access now the page for block setup you will notice a new block called ScoreLock&lt;br /&gt;
You may place this block into a course, but it wont do much, but remind you, that the installation is not finished yet.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Part 2: Hack Installation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* In global block setup open settings of ScoreLock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Administration &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Configuration &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Blocks&lt;br /&gt;
*Check install&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:GlobalInstall.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Open any page, where you have added the ScoreLock block or add it right now.&lt;br /&gt;
*The installation is triggered and you receive a success message (or, hopefully not, an error message in the block).&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ScoreLockIsInstalled.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
*ScoreLock is now functional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If anything went wrong===&lt;br /&gt;
I tested installation and de-installation by now about 50 times and it worked, but you never know ...&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t panic!&#039;&#039;&#039; All files are still on your server!&lt;br /&gt;
*All original files in /moodle/course/ and in /moodle/course/format/weeks and /topics, as well as the moodlelib in /moodle/lib have only get renamed with the extension .org.&lt;br /&gt;
*To change back simply delete this four characters from the end of the file name.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not forget to check global settings of the block ScoreLock to avoid another unwanted installation attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
===De-installation===&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the block settings in admin and check de-install from the ScoreLock block.&lt;br /&gt;
*Access again any page with the ScoreLock block to trigger the de-installation of the hack.&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:ScoreLockIsDeInstalled.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the hack is removed (see message on the block) you may delete the ScoreLock block at the global block settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not forget to delete the folder scorelock from /moodle/blocks and the .scl files from /moodle/course and /moodle/lib&lt;br /&gt;
Once finished, there is no more part of ScoreLock on your system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Developer&#039;s notes==&lt;br /&gt;
===Major Changes===&lt;br /&gt;
In previous versions of Activity Locking the result, whether a student has accessed a resource has been pulled from the normal log. Because of that, the log files could never have been deleted. Score Lock has its own table, where the accessing of students on resources is saved immediately. With the optional block, teacher can allow the students to delete their own record and/or the teacher may delete all or selected students entries of the course.&lt;br /&gt;
Score Lock includes a block, that is used for log control and installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open Issues===&lt;br /&gt;
There is still a problem, that I have not figured yet:&lt;br /&gt;
:Since Score Lock is part a hack, you can not update your system without destroying Score Lock and on re-installation upgraded features (of moodle) will be lost. I will try to make up for this with updated versions or even a durable solution, but it may take me a while.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Score locks do not backup and restore their lock settings.&#039;&#039;&#039; This is because blocks can&#039;t backup their database tables. We have a fix, but first we need the patch in http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-8270 put into core. Please vote for it:-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The future of Score Lock===&lt;br /&gt;
*Once the beta has been successfully tested an most bugs are fixed I will release the code of Score Lock on sourceforge.&lt;br /&gt;
*I have started on version 1.1, where backing up and restoring of locks and settings is included.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Copyrights===&lt;br /&gt;
Score Lock is under General Public License.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
Conditional Activity forum&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Latest_release_notes&amp;diff=17784</id>
		<title>Latest release notes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Latest_release_notes&amp;diff=17784"/>
		<updated>2006-11-05T22:50:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Headline features */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{About Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.8==&lt;br /&gt;
Under development, this version is not recommended for production sites yet, and is only for testing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.7==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under final test phase, the stable release expected soon. Moodle 1.7 Beta 2 is now available from CVS or the [http://download.moodle.org Moodle download page].  This version is not recommended for production sites yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://tracker.moodle.org/secure/ReleaseNote.jspa?version=10120&amp;amp;styleName=Html&amp;amp;projectId=10011&amp;amp;Create=Create This page shows details about issues resolved in this version]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Headline features===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
:: Permissions based on fine-grained capabilities allow all kinds of roles to be created and assigned in all contexts around Moodle.  This creates a great deal more flexibility in the permissions that you can grant to people.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML database schema]]&lt;br /&gt;
:: added support for MS-SQL and Oracle with more databases to come.  Developers now have just one XML file to edit when changing the database structure, and there is even a very funky editor for this file built-in to Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* New Admin interface&lt;br /&gt;
:: Completely new admin interface, with accessible design and cool features to make access to settings fast and easy.&lt;br /&gt;
* AJAX Course editing&lt;br /&gt;
:: The Topics and Weekly course formats now feature AJAX editing which means you can drag drop blocks, activities and sections (weeks/topics) and it all happens instantly.  No more page reloading!&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Unit tests|Unit testing framework]]&lt;br /&gt;
:: Making it easier for developers to write test code, which should ultimately lead to a more reliable Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Authorize.net Payment Gateway]] enrolment plugin &lt;br /&gt;
::Accepts &#039;Electronic Checks (ACH)&#039;. After a user approving echeck, an admin who has upload csv capacity must import a CSV file to get the user enrolled in the Payment Management page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other improvements===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Improvements to the [[Database module]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Template/Field settings can now be saved as Presets and shared across a site.&lt;br /&gt;
**Presets are just zip files, and can also be shared between sites.&lt;br /&gt;
**Moodle 1.7 comes with one sample preset (an Image Gallery) with more to come.&lt;br /&gt;
**New latitude/longitude data type&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Improvements to the [[Lesson module]]&lt;br /&gt;
**Now has a more unified view of lesson screens.&lt;br /&gt;
**Teacher editing:&lt;br /&gt;
***Collapsed view has a nicer format, displays more information regarding each page and allows the creation of new pages.&lt;br /&gt;
***Editing is now speedier by replacing 3 second redirect delays with a notification system.&lt;br /&gt;
**New feature: display default feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
***Default is &#039;&#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039;&#039; so previous lessons behave as before.&lt;br /&gt;
***Description: if no &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; is entered for a question answer and this setting is turned &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039;, then the user skips the feedback page.&lt;br /&gt;
**Graceful degrade of JavaScript.&lt;br /&gt;
**Several bug fixes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Improvements to the [[Quiz module]]&lt;br /&gt;
:* The teacher can configure comments that are displayed to the student at the end of their attempt, with the comment displayed depending on the student&#039;s score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Improvements to some core question types&lt;br /&gt;
:* All question types can now have some general feedback. This is displayed to all students after they have finished the question (depending on the quiz settings) and does not depend on what response the student gave. Use this to tell the student what the question was about, or link them to more information about the topic it covers.&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Matching question type|Matching]] questions can have extra wrong answers, and work when two questions have the same answer.&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Multiple Choice question type|Multiple Choice]] questions can have feedback for the whole question, as well as specific answers. This is particularly useful for multiple-response questions.&lt;br /&gt;
:* [[Numerical question type|Numerical]] questions can have different answers with different precisions and scores. (Previously this was only supported via GIFT import. Now you can edit questions like this.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.6.3==&lt;br /&gt;
10th October, 2006&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://tracker.moodle.org/secure/ReleaseNote.jspa?version=10140&amp;amp;styleName=Text&amp;amp;projectId=10011 Full details of these issues can be found in the tracker]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security Bugfix===&lt;br /&gt;
* A vulnerability was discovered that could allow SQL injections if a parameter was improperly used.  Full details of this particular issue are on the [http://security.moodle.org/ Moodle Security site].  All registered Moodle admins were notified by direct email on Saturday September 30th.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General Bugs Fixed===&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-3048 MDL-3048] ]      - Release note should note not to use some PHP versions&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-3805 MDL-3805] ]      - mod.html in NEWMODULE.zip is not XHTML1.0 Transitional compliant&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-5378 MDL-5378] ]      - shorten_text doesn&#039;t work for oriental languages&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-5601 MDL-5601] ]      - cloze question restore error problem&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-5884 MDL-5884] ]      - Turn Student View On&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-5893 MDL-5893] ]      - Blackboard export/backup course does not restore to Moodle correctly&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6084 MDL-6084] ]      - Restore to new course failure notice if  logged in as course creator&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6128 MDL-6128] ]      - 1.6, special chars and messaging system.&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6193 MDL-6193] ]      - problem with login/index.php file&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6205 MDL-6205] ]      - slashes not stripped when re-editing profile&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6224 MDL-6224] ]      - Syntax error creating tables on install&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6247 MDL-6247] ]      - Error checking for missing themes&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6271 MDL-6271] ]      - breadcrumb problem&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6272 MDL-6272] ]      - DB Enrolment not recording enrolment end date&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6334 MDL-6334] ]      - Unnecessary group menu in Feedback popup window&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6336 MDL-6336] ]      - After utf8-migration unserializing of old essay fails&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6341 MDL-6341] ]      - &amp;quot;Student view&amp;quot; locks out designers/administrators from courses not available to students&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6342 MDL-6342] ]      - cannot move forum post to other forum when the subject includes an apostrophe&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6363 MDL-6363] ]      - typo in mod/forum/restorelib.php prevents grouped discussions from being accessible to group after a restore.&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6375 MDL-6375] ]      - Uploaded assignments are not available from the student submission page once graded&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6480 MDL-6480] ]      - Import of multichoice questions in Moodle XML format doesn&#039;t use shuffle option. Fix included&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6517 MDL-6517] ]      - Adding or editing post produces &amp;quot;ERROR: invalid input syntax for integer: &amp;quot;Object id #XXX&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6518 MDL-6518] ]      - How to make new themes link no longer required&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6521 MDL-6521] ]      - Single discussion forums can be splitted and it hasn&#039;t too much sense....&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6537 MDL-6537] ]      - past students receive email from forum&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6538 MDL-6538] ]      - Bug in hotpot upgrade script 1.6.1 -&amp;gt; 1.6.2 with MetaColumns() method&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6615 MDL-6615] ]      - Highlighting search terms in forum search text posts fails&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6632 MDL-6632] ]      - scorm_grade_user function in locallib.php file has errors&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6649 MDL-6649] ]      - HTML Editor in Quiz Essay Question unreliable&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6686 MDL-6686] ]      - Streamed Chat Locks Send Message Field&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6750 MDL-6750] ]      - change_password.php produces JS error.&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6754 MDL-6754] ]      - moodle.php in de_utf8 langpack has wrong locale&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6757 MDL-6757] ]      - Insert a Chinese charachter string to label resource result error.&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6770 MDL-6770] ]      - Student cannot see handed-in assignment&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6791 MDL-6791] ]      - Streamed Chat JS bug Prevents Use&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6824 MDL-6824] ]      - redundant style declaration in theme&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6837 MDL-6837] ]      - Make a language file entry for the wording of popup blocker checker&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6841 MDL-6841] ]      - Student View button fails when course is hidden to students&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6842 MDL-6842] ]      - Resource frameset error in IE6&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6866 MDL-6866] ]      - A required parameter (backup_unique_code) was missing&amp;quot; error&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6876 MDL-6876] ]      - Grades computed incorrectly if assignment name appears more than twice in a course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Improvement===&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6280 MDL-6280] ] - Backup files should not be included in new backups&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6572 MDL-6572] ] - Allow students to access their uploaded documents after grading.&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6662 MDL-6662] ] - why footer with margin-top: 100px&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-6878 MDL-6878] ] - Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) files in Moodle are not correctly displayed in many Browsers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===New Feature===&lt;br /&gt;
* [ [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-5653 MDL-5653] ] - add blacklisted level into environment XML&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.6.2==&lt;br /&gt;
12th September, 2006&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security===&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed handling of uploaded files in Database module&lt;br /&gt;
* Module instance id is now properly validated when creating course module object; developers should use get_coursemodule_from_id() to get valid $cm&lt;br /&gt;
* Default error reporting level was lowered to 5, E_WARNINGs are no longer displayed on production sites with debug off.&lt;br /&gt;
* Multiple problems leading to information leakage fixed in help.php file&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed information leakage from scheduled backups&lt;br /&gt;
* Added basic detection of dataroot accessible from Internet, web installer now better suggests dataroot location outside of web file area&lt;br /&gt;
* Swf is now disabled by default in Mediaplugin&lt;br /&gt;
* forgot_password.php does not allow remote email or username enumeration by default, the old behavior can be enabled by setting protectusernames to No in site configuration&lt;br /&gt;
* Undisclosed SQL injections fixed by automatic data conversions in adodb layer&lt;br /&gt;
* Theoretical XSS problems fixed in doc/index.php and files/index.php scripts&lt;br /&gt;
* Access to tex and algebra files is blocked when filters are disabled&lt;br /&gt;
* Request for redirection in jumpto.php protected with sesskey&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Bug Fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed error when upgrading forum read tracking&lt;br /&gt;
* Locales from language packs should finally work - please check your configuration variables and empty the locale field&lt;br /&gt;
* Added missing link for course request&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed several glossary problems with non-ascii characters&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug where you could not regrade a quiz question where the teacher had added a comment with a &#039; character.&lt;br /&gt;
* Quiz import of BlackBoard V6 files now much more reliable&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed scheduled backups - they were broken in 1.6 and 1.6.1&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed missing guest icons from course listing&lt;br /&gt;
* Database sessions respect sessiontimeout setting&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed redirect problems during upgrade resulting in &amp;quot;Table xxx already exists&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson module: the &amp;quot;(Continue)&amp;quot; no longer displays for 3 seconds after branch tables.&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson module: now properly checks import formats for support.&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson module: feedback is set properly during the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
* and many other smaller fixes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===New Features===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize.net Payment Gateway: Autoconfigures credit card types if the merchant does not accept some types of credit cards&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
* Broken images in published question categories&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.6.1==&lt;br /&gt;
20th July, 2006&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Bug Fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed regression in Turkish locale handling&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize and Paypal enrolment plugin cleanup&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed serious problem with failing Database restore&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed restore of HotPot module containing attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* Minor Database module fixes&lt;br /&gt;
* National characters in graphs now work for most languages out of the box&lt;br /&gt;
* Reviewed and fixed all *nix locale codes in language packs&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed problems when using Resources with Blocks on the frontpage&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed missing events on the first day of month in calendar&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed several problems in Lesson - scores, branch tables, HTML editor issues&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed broken intermodule relinking of absolute paths - please do not use course backups from original 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
* PDF byteserving problems caused by incorrect partial content length solved&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed several regressions in handling of multiple groups&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed alphabet problems in Glossary&lt;br /&gt;
* Chameleon theme fixes and enhancements&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed all hard coded admin paths&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed moving of course sections&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed grading of Essays in Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
* Several Quiz regrading problems solved&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions are now exported into backupdata directory&lt;br /&gt;
* Added workaround for problems when editting two quizes in one browser&lt;br /&gt;
* Lots of other Quiz related bugs fixed - thanks Tim!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed IE unsecure items warning on sites with https login&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved cookie test on the login page&lt;br /&gt;
* Potential security issue with unzipping maliciously-crafted zip files fixed&lt;br /&gt;
* Satinized input parameters in help.php&lt;br /&gt;
* Calendar view.php now respects forcelogin setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* And lots of other minor fixes worth upgrading&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===New Features===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enhanced frontpage settings - frontpage can now be different for logged in users, changed category list display&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved administration page layout&lt;br /&gt;
* Possibility to change graph font for all locales - moodledata/lang/default.ttf takes precedence over lib/default.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
* Local language packs may also contain default.ttf&lt;br /&gt;
* Backported improved lang.php from HEAD&lt;br /&gt;
* New config.php option $CFG-&amp;gt;allowvisiblecoursesinhiddencategories&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Known Problems===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Broken images in published question categories&lt;br /&gt;
* Small number of sites reports problems with Quiz upgrade - please always do a full database backup before any upgrade!&lt;br /&gt;
* Workshop backup/restore and Workshop import from other course not supported&lt;br /&gt;
* Additional feature &#039;Sidebar Block&#039; uses section 1000, but 1000 is not included in the backup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Related===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Third party modules should be already updated for 1.6.x - you must install new versions before UTF-8 migration!&lt;br /&gt;
* New integration of phpMyAdmin available - fixes upstream security problems and compatiblility with PHP 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.6==&lt;br /&gt;
19th June, 2006&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: Moodle 1.6 requires PHP 4.3.0 (or PHP 5.1.0) and MySQL 4.1.16 (4.1.12 if you use latin languages only). Here is more info on [[Upgrading to Moodle 1.6]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===New features===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[UTF-8 migration|Unicode]]&lt;br /&gt;
::Moodle is now 100% Unicode, which means any language can be mixed together and an end to a number of problems that different character sets caused us.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MoodleDocs development|Documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
::A new one-stop wiki site for ALL Moodle documentation, including links from Moodle itself&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database module]]&lt;br /&gt;
::A new activity module that allows collaborative collection of structured data, useful for many things!&lt;br /&gt;
* [[LAMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
::Integrated via a course format and an activity module&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs]]&lt;br /&gt;
::Allows reflection on an ongoing basis.  Entries are marked and can be viewed by user, course, group, site etc.  Contains first new support for [[Tags]].  &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
::All reports are now centralised under Course reports and Admin reports.  New reports can be written as plugins and dropped in very easily.  One big new report is the new course-based statistics system from Catalyst.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
::A centralized bank of questions with the potential to be (re-)used in a variety of modules.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[My Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
::A dashboard interface that allows an overview for each user of all their courses etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Hive integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
::This initial integration with Hive allows teachers to upload, browse, search and select [[Resources|resources]] within the external repository.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Multiple groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
::Users can be part of multiple groups within a course&lt;br /&gt;
* [[IMS content package]] resource type&lt;br /&gt;
::Supports the loading of any content package as a resource, with an optional repository for sharing packages between courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Course backup|Granularised backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chameleon|Chameleon theme]]&lt;br /&gt;
:: An interactive Moodle theme&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enrolment plugins|Multi enrolment]]&lt;br /&gt;
::Moodle&#039;s enrolment plugins can be used simultaneously on the same site. Also new [[IMS Enterprise]] enrolment plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Authorize.net Payment Gateway]] enrolment plugin &lt;br /&gt;
::New feature called &#039;Order Review&#039;. Admins and teachers may accept or deny payments before processing the credit card and they can also refund payments after processing the credit card in &#039;Payment Management&#039; page. Students may view their order details. Address Verification System (AVS) and Scheduled-Capture support added. For &#039;Manual-Capture&#039; admins are notified 5 days prior to pending orders expiring.&lt;br /&gt;
===See also===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:Category:Moodle 1.6|Moodle 1.6 features]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.5.4==&lt;br /&gt;
21st May, 2006&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Because this release contains important security fixes, we highly advise that sites using any previous version of Moodle upgrade to this version as soon as possible.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Various fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved kses cleaning of html SC#204&lt;br /&gt;
* Prevent unwanted password change here SC#225&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for Secunia Advisory SA18267, plus some logging of suspicious activity.&lt;br /&gt;
* AdoDB tests cleanup after Secunia Advisory SA18267&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed $cfg-&amp;gt;forceloginforprofiles logic SC#207. Backported from HEAD&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Various updates/improvements in the the Environmental Check allowing to check if your server suits future Moodle requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4619. Fixed one DB query not following coding rules.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4607. Avoid duplication of course shortname on restore.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed one problem with auto-link filters and frames.&lt;br /&gt;
* Important fixes to muti-byte text handling routines.&lt;br /&gt;
* Small changes to the installer.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 3853. Some important improvements in the restore of log actions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4328. Prevent some warnings in the blocks system.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4341. Extending multi-lang support to the &amp;quot;jumpto&amp;quot; menu (showed in collapsed mode).&lt;br /&gt;
* Added rss_get_url() to 1.5 to help support data module&lt;br /&gt;
* Added support for having a linked tab even if it is currently selected.&lt;br /&gt;
* RSS Client block: Removed secondary cache. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4625 Bug 4625]&lt;br /&gt;
* Email confirmation now includes lastname. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4869 Bug 4869]&lt;br /&gt;
* Database connection errors can now be reported to an admin. See $CFG-&amp;gt;emailconnectionerrors in config-dist.php.&lt;br /&gt;
* Metacourses: Fixed a problem with self enrolment in child courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Several MySQL v5 compatibility fixes&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid listing more than 200 courses in my courses block, and course listing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
* SCORM: Fixed lesson status skin support&lt;br /&gt;
* Skype: Added webstatus icon&lt;br /&gt;
* File uploads: Only create a directory if needed, [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4659 bug 4659]&lt;br /&gt;
* Admin Block. Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4627 bug 4627]: Hide &amp;quot;change password&amp;quot; link in admin block if the user is restricted. Credits for report &amp;amp; patch go to Joseph Rezeau.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTMLArea: Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4562 bug 4562]. Fix posted by sgarcia.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4626 bug 4626] - weblib.php: $course object conversion error in &amp;amp;quot;print_footer &amp;amp;quot; function&lt;br /&gt;
* Messaging: Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4621 bug 4621] errors in MySQL v3.23 with message backup.&lt;br /&gt;
* Introducing Admin-&amp;gt;Environment to help users assess installed software prior to the 1.6 upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Course Restore: Now we avoid duplicates. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4607 Bug 4607]&lt;br /&gt;
* Assignment: Guests can no longer submit an online assignment. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4604 Bug 4604]&lt;br /&gt;
* File Downloads: Fixed problems for slow (dial up) clients, and avoid hogging memory when PHP&#039;s output compression is on.&lt;br /&gt;
* Wiki: Supports initial load of contents from course file area. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=3830 Bug 3830]&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson: Now when a teacher edits a page with the &amp;quot;Edit page contents&amp;quot; button and then saves or cancels, s/he gets redirected back to the lesson navigation. This will help to streamline the editing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Activity Modules Block - [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4586 bug 4586]&lt;br /&gt;
* Metacourse: Fixes unenrolling [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4541 bug 4541]&lt;br /&gt;
* File uploads: Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4533 bug 4533] - Max upload size at course level ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrol/Authorize.net: Added Address Verification System (AVS) support.&lt;br /&gt;
* Online Users Block: Limit the number of students displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Unicode Support: Typo3 Library updated to newest version.&lt;br /&gt;
* Course Categories: Fixed courses and subcategories in an invisible category being visible. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4074 Bug 4074]&lt;br /&gt;
* Wiki: Fixed a fatal error updating wiki pages.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added autocomplete=off in form tag to avoid browser autocomplete [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4423 bug:4423]&lt;br /&gt;
* Password change: Primary administrator password can only be changed by the administraror him/herself.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrol/Authorize.net: Some changes:- allow_internal is not need anymore. Shows two option if enrolment key of course is set.- login_https is required for payment pages. My credit card is important. If you haven&#039;t a certificate forgot this module. (security)- Expiry date of credit card is more friendly :).&lt;br /&gt;
* User profile: Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4400 bug 4400]&lt;br /&gt;
* Removed old THEME variable.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added some more CSS hooks for the correctness feedback&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4366 bug 4366]&lt;br /&gt;
* Makes autologinguest possible at site level&lt;br /&gt;
* Micro-increment version number to 2.0.10&lt;br /&gt;
* Corrected adjustment of relative URLs in &amp;lt;EMBED&amp;gt; tag&lt;br /&gt;
* Merging from HEAD:Fix for [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4371 bug 4371] (also SC#199):Now manually created users with admin privileges and force change passwordcannot change their username with impunity.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4067 bug 4067] - allow user to update assignment when not yet marked&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4314 bug 4314]&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4206 bug 4206]&lt;br /&gt;
* Delayed merge from HEAD - If tablelib is going to do fullname voodoo, allow default sort field to be firstname/lastname&lt;br /&gt;
* Log actions must be strored to DB without &amp;amp;amp;print_log() takes care of it! [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=3853 Bug 3853]&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixes [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4354 bug 4354]&lt;br /&gt;
* shorten_text() AFTER format properly. See [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4355 bug  4355]&lt;br /&gt;
* Prevent a warning when params is empty. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4328 Bug 4328]&lt;br /&gt;
* Now the section &amp;quot;jumpto&amp;quot; menu (showed in collapse mode), supportsthe multilang filter. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4341 Bug 4341]&lt;br /&gt;
* Print performance info if exists and $CFG-&amp;gt;perfdebug is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4351 bug 4351]. New parasmeter for get_record_sql to disableauto-added LIMIT (in case we are using our own)&lt;br /&gt;
* Solved bug found when trying to backup all users! http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=27105&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixing [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4345 bug 4345]: merging problem when fixing [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4303 bug 4303]&lt;br /&gt;
* Mimic changes from &amp;quot;Ought to mention the improved assignment grading!&amp;quot;Merged from HEAD&lt;br /&gt;
* Ought to mention the improved assignment grading!&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixes [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4086 bug 4086] spelling mistake&lt;br /&gt;
* Commenting out gz_handler since it seem to cause problemsmore on http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=34376&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug in &amp;quot;Prevent late submissions&amp;quot;, thanks to Samuli, [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4780 bug 4780]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enrolment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment: Better explanation of flat file enrolment format. Re-formatted the imporved flat file enorlment description&lt;br /&gt;
* Auth/LDAP: Better support for ActiveDirectory&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrol/Authorize.net: PostgreSQL support and some indexes for speed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize.net: Address Verification System (AVS) support added.&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize.net: $CGF-&amp;gt;login_https must be ON for payment pages.&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize.net: Shows two forms if the enrolment key of the course is set (internal and authorize forms).&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize.net: IIS https fix. It doesn&#039;t recognize empty($_SERVER[&#039;HTTPS&#039;]) but accepts HTTPS=off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Forum Module&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4355. Solved one visualisation problem in the page showing the list of forums.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4360 bug 4360]&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4431 bug 4431], affecting site course, added function forum_user_can_view_post in lib.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Glossary Module&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4543, 4713. Fixed some problems with entries and categories containing more than one word in their title.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4858. Fixed one problem with formats, not being detected properly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 4915. Entrylist format now displays the &amp;quot;Send Ratings&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Hotpot Module&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Add support for HP5 quizzes (including JBC and old JQuiz)&lt;br /&gt;
* Removed weighting from questiontext in JCloze import&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed import of JCloze into quiz module as a MULTIANSWER question&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug in restoring attempts from backup&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson Module&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson: $navigation and $grade_value were undefined when lesson was added to site main page&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson: Lesson Essay Question Can&#039;t be Graded when attempt not finished. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4174 Bug 4174]&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson: Added cancel button. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4216 Bug 4216] - cancel button&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson: Fixed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=37537 problem with storing the answerid for numerical questions].&lt;br /&gt;
* Lesson: Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=1187 bug 1187]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz Module&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 4250: Added missing percentages to the grade selector&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 4495: Don&#039;t apply lateness check when teacher previews&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 4544: Incorrect path to exported files in some language packs&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 4780: Bug in &amp;quot;Prevent late submissions&amp;quot; setting fixed&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 5070: Students can&#039;t see quizzes when they are closed&lt;br /&gt;
* Turned off regrading of quizzes that have the attemptonlast option set&lt;br /&gt;
* A number of other minor interface fixes&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4319 bug 4319]. Thanks to Jaroslav&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4217 bug 4217]&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4829 bug 4829]&lt;br /&gt;
* Now we avoid checking for lateness when teacher previews. [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4495 Bug 4495]&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4688 bug 4688]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=39548 Rounding errors could lead to &amp;quot;Partially correct&amp;quot; for correct answers]&lt;br /&gt;
* Added missing percentages to the grade selector, [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4250 bug 4250]&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid error messages in case $quiz-&amp;gt;sumgrades is zero, [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4454 bug 4454]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=27730#181773 get_actual_response() method for cloze question type] contributed by Jean-Michel&lt;br /&gt;
* Better PostgreSQL support&lt;br /&gt;
* Now With Nicer Presentation of Questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Summary text shouldn&#039;t be cleaned as only entered by teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4345 bug 4345]. Report performance improvements caused regression with MySQLv3&lt;br /&gt;
* Now we turn off browser-based autocomplete. Fixes [http://moodle.org/bugs/bug.php?op=show&amp;amp;bugid=4423 bug 4423] - Short Answer Quiz Q&#039;s Saving Form Entries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Resource Module&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Solved one problem on restore that was causing some links to become corrupted.&lt;br /&gt;
* Slightly changes to the delete_instance() function in resources to allow future improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
* Resource restore: Solved bug when [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=38801 decoding encoded links for resource]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wiki Module&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Solved one problem sending double-slashed info to DB.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug 3830. Load of initial content from course file area is now allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.5.3==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11th November, 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Because this release contains important security fixes, we highly advise that sites using any previous version of Moodle upgrade to this version as soon as possible.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===A few new things===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* We now have SCORM 1.3 (SCORM 2004) support!&lt;br /&gt;
* Much improved Assignment grading interface, including &amp;quot;quick grading&amp;quot; options&lt;br /&gt;
* A new Single-Sign-On API is available&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Various fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Contains warnings when Moodle is used on an PHP configuration known to be insecure&lt;br /&gt;
* Contains fixes for some recently reported security problems (see [http://security.moodle.org/ security.moodle.org])&lt;br /&gt;
* Backups now runs a lot faster medium/large installs. Many issues fixed in this area&lt;br /&gt;
* Listing of directory sizes can be made much faster on Linux/Unix servers, thanks to a performance fix you can enable from Admin-&amp;gt;Variables: &amp;quot;path_to_du&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* We now log more meaningful IP addresses when the server or the clients are working behind a proxy&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed some issues with PHP accelerators&lt;br /&gt;
* Upgrade scripts have been refined and work much better for PostgreSQL installations&lt;br /&gt;
* General PostgreSQL port code cleanup&lt;br /&gt;
* Upgrading to 1.5.3 will fix any legacy Journal to Online Assignment upgrade issues&lt;br /&gt;
* RSS libraries now support RSS 2.0 categories, see bug 3654&lt;br /&gt;
* Better accesibilty in file uploads, see bug 3662&lt;br /&gt;
* Better support for site-wide HTTPS, see bug 3848&lt;br /&gt;
* We now send away bots (like Googlebot) from that try mangled URLs, see bug 3958&lt;br /&gt;
* Better DST support for non-logged-in users&lt;br /&gt;
* Better DST support for repeat events in Calendar&lt;br /&gt;
* Small fixes to the lesson, choice and grade modules&lt;br /&gt;
* Minor CSS improvements to formal_white and orangewhite themes&lt;br /&gt;
* Better pagination in course listing and loglive pages&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an IE-only bug related to HTMLArea content where user-edited tables could float and hide part of the UI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixes to change password/forgotten password with external auth&lt;br /&gt;
* Data fetched from external DB or LDAP is now truncated correctly&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 4305 -- better login block behaviour when using secureforms&lt;br /&gt;
* Better support for utf-8 user data from external auth&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: General fixes covering sync_users script and logging of errors&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Fixed bug 3141 - Can&#039;t update external data with LDAP authentication&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Fixed bug 3992 - LDAP password including a quote does not work - credits go to Kita&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Better support for ActiveDirectory.&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Fixed bug #3594&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Better handling of multi-source field mapping&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Fix for using DN as idnumber - thanks fo Jeff Graham - http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=28840&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enrolment and metacourses&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Metacourses: Prevent normal users to gain access to meta courses via manual enrolment&lt;br /&gt;
* Metacourses: better support for MySQL v3.23.x&lt;br /&gt;
* DB: Enrolment lookups now work reliably with Moodle on MySQL and Postgres&lt;br /&gt;
* DB: Non-MySQL databases work again as external enrolment databases&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Fixed a wrong call to add_teacher in LDAP plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Servers being down or unavailable no longer prevent logins&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Course auto-creation works again&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: Fixed several bugs reported by Jeff Graham and Barron Koralesky -- including bugs 3912 and 3974&lt;br /&gt;
* LDAP: We can now bind non-anonymously to LDAP&lt;br /&gt;
* Authorize.net: several fixes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Resources&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Bugfix: Avoid linking to empty or unlinkable activity names&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Forums&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Big and small optimizations to tracking of read/unread messages, specially for PostgreSQL&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed some PostgreSQL bugs&lt;br /&gt;
* Some more actions are now supported by backup/restore when processing log records, see bug 3582&lt;br /&gt;
* Now message forum RSS feeds are including category data -- useful under some RSS agregators able to group messages, see bug 3654&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed paging on forum search&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Blocks&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Several performance improvements&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixes to the upgrade process, including PostgreSQL syntax and lower memory usage&lt;br /&gt;
* Brought in several bugfixes from 1.6dev&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3478: Cannot add RSS feed as course creator&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3793: Prevent warning message when configuring a glossary_random block in a course which has no glossaries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Some CSS style fixes&lt;br /&gt;
* Better compatibility with themes that contain forms in the headers&lt;br /&gt;
* Highlighting of correct answers can now be turned off&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3986: Too many random questions. (mindforge)&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed missing action icons&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3899 and removed some &#039;missing course object&#039; messages&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3950: Ee-attempt button inconsistency for multi-attempt quizzes&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3953: Quiz/report.php pagesize can be set to 0, credits to Jean-Michel&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed potential data data corruption bug 3915&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3884: Quiz correct highlights missing for 2 of 3 options.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for the Student review highlight doesn&#039;t seem to work bug&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3804: Differences in question types between 1.5 and 1.6&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3822: don&#039;t count previews as attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bug 3807: Question numbering issue&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixes for the item analysis plug-in, assembled by Jean-Michel&lt;br /&gt;
* Now we reset the timeout counter to avoid timeouts&lt;br /&gt;
* Several improvements contributed by Jean-Michel Vedrine. You can now change the number of attempts per page displayed on screen, and download results to Excel/text file, including detailed grades&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed export bug with non-English languages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SCORM&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* We now support SCORM 1.3 (SCORM 2004)!&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a bug with next and prev SCO search&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed bugs related to masteryscore&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem in AICC course tracking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wiki&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Now paging of older versions is showed and working properly, see bug 3750&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mediaplugin filter now finds multi-line links in HTML code&lt;br /&gt;
* Censor filter: Added original word as title to the blacked-out version. The filter can obscure actual important words by mistake (eg Dickens) and there needs to be some way to recover the meaning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.5.2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
16th July, 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Various fixes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*  Journal -&amp;gt; Assignment upgrade now works properly :-/&lt;br /&gt;
* Assignment submodules now upgrade as expected&lt;br /&gt;
* Various other bugs with new Assignments fixed&lt;br /&gt;
* Journal module is now disabled by default on new installations&lt;br /&gt;
* Login page is now 100% HTTPS if required&lt;br /&gt;
* Various small standard theme tweaks&lt;br /&gt;
* Fix for recent matching questions display bug in Quiz&lt;br /&gt;
* Language editor no longer creates empty files when not necessary (caused country list bug)&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed some manifest parsing problems in SCORM module&lt;br /&gt;
* Multilang filter now deals with pack names that contain numbers&lt;br /&gt;
* Files are now force-downloaded (fixes IE problems and some security issues)&lt;br /&gt;
* Relinking debugging output is escaped&lt;br /&gt;
* Large MP3 player now displays ID3 tags properly again&lt;br /&gt;
* Some chat daemon improvements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Some new things ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Orangewhite theme optimised for use on PDA&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum user posts page can be called without userid&lt;br /&gt;
* Altavista BabelFish now allowed in as guest when Google is&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.5.1==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8th July, 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Various fixes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Several potential security problems solved&lt;br /&gt;
* Allowobjectembed setting now works correctly&lt;br /&gt;
* Speed problem on IE, caused by tab hover fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cut and paste in editor on Firefox has a more helpful warning message&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a session problem when logged on as admin during upgrade from very old Moodle version&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed editing problem in Main menu of site&lt;br /&gt;
* Minor CSS display problems in a few areas were fixed&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed the adding of a single discussion forum&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed Lesson problems with calculating grades, and dates&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed Lesson problems with entering a cluster after a page&lt;br /&gt;
* Censor filter was fixed to make it work better with old themes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Some new things===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* New theme: Wood&lt;br /&gt;
* Metal theme updated for 1.5&lt;br /&gt;
* Many language updates for most languages, including a new language: Khmer&lt;br /&gt;
* Block classes can now run custom code when an instance is created/deleted (this is useful for blocks that need to set up non-trivial data structures)&lt;br /&gt;
* Wizard for Calculated Questions in Quiz was rewritten&lt;br /&gt;
* Backup/Restore module selection is now improved and much easier&lt;br /&gt;
* Backup/Restore module has much improved relinking support, it&#039;s now faster and easier to implement in new modules&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle 1.5==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5th June, 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find the release notes of the current stable version of Moodle. &#039;&#039;&#039;If you experience any bugs in this release, please report them at [http://moodle.org/bugs moodle.org/bugs] so we can fix them in the next release.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Headline features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Web pages are compliant with XHTML Transitional 1.0&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved &#039;&#039;&#039;Accessibility&#039;&#039;&#039;, aiming for compliance with WAI (W3C), SENDA (UK) and Section 508 (US) criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* Very strong &#039;&#039;&#039;new Themes system&#039;&#039;&#039;, allowing cascading themes, user themes, course themes, with very fine control of every page in Moodle via CSS.&lt;br /&gt;
* Integrated &#039;&#039;&#039;Messaging&#039;&#039;&#039; feature for direct communication between all users in the site, featuring realtime popup windows, notification, email copies, blocking, history, WYSIWYG editor, etc&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum read/unread tracking with highlights allows you to see new postings at a glance and to control how these are displayed (per forum, per user or per site).&lt;br /&gt;
* New &#039;&#039;&#039;Blocks&#039;&#039;&#039; system, allowing multiple copies of blocks and better block configuration&lt;br /&gt;
* Full support for &#039;&#039;&#039;Daylight Savings Time&#039;&#039;&#039; in every locality around the globe, so everyone always see the correct local time for all events.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &#039;&#039;&#039;extended gradebook&#039;&#039;&#039; allowing custom weighting of different activities, setting extra grades (or taking out others) and improved display and sorting options&lt;br /&gt;
* Users can be required to agree to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Site Policy&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other major system-wide improvements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Admin&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;maintenance mode&amp;quot; allows the admin to temporarily disable a site (during upgrades, for example).&lt;br /&gt;
* Moodle can automatically download a new list of timezones from moodle.org or elsewhere and install it to the database (Olson files are supported too)&lt;br /&gt;
* New version of Moodle MySQL Admin module (available separately)&lt;br /&gt;
* New calendar options page provides user interface to configure the behavior of the calendar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* New Shibboleth Support&lt;br /&gt;
* New CAS Support&lt;br /&gt;
* New PAM Support&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved LDAP integration, so that LDAP can now control course creation, group assignments. Increased performance and scalability performing user synchronisation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Certain user fields can be locked by the admin when using external authentication&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved session handling now detects &amp;quot;crossover&amp;quot; sessions that we have found in some buggy PHP installations and prevents them&lt;br /&gt;
* Sessions can now be stored in the database (good for clustered installations!)&lt;br /&gt;
* Users can be forced to change their password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Files&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Standardised file browsing in all areas&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved uploading, with support for automated Virus scanning of new documents using ClamAV.&lt;br /&gt;
* Slasharguments now work also on IIS (upgrade to PHP 4.3.11 needed for ISAPI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Standardised filter library makes it trivial to write new filters that require searching and highlighting of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* Huge efficiency improvements for complex filters like the Glossary filter&lt;br /&gt;
* New Tidy filter uses the W3C Tidy program to (optionally) clean all user-entered texts throughout the site and convert it to valid XHTML code&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved censorship filter, now &amp;quot;blacks out&amp;quot; words using styles and uses a word list from the language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved Flash MP3 player, now shows progress bar while downloading and playing&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved Multi-language filter is faster, more forgiving of syntax errors, and uses new editor-friendly syntax: &amp;lt;span lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto-linking filters (glossary, activities) can work to link all the occurrences (old behaviour), once for each text block or only once for the whole page ($CFG-&amp;gt;filtermatchonepertext, $CFG-&amp;gt;filtermatchoneperpage).&lt;br /&gt;
* More text can now be filtered in Moodle, including activity names, headings and other such small texts. This makes it possible to design completely multi-lingual sites in Moodle that fully appears in the user&#039;s chosen language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Themes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Modules can provide standard styles&lt;br /&gt;
* Themes can override required styles of other themes&lt;br /&gt;
* Users and courses can choose their own themes if the admin allows it&lt;br /&gt;
* Implementation of tabs interface on many pages&lt;br /&gt;
* Modules, Blocks and Languages can define their own standard styles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;HTML Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The toolbuttons offered in the editor toolbar are now configurable by the admin&lt;br /&gt;
* Search and Replace text within the editor text area (with optional use of regular expressions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Course management&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Transparent Blackboard 5.5 course importing (partial 6.0 support)&lt;br /&gt;
* The new meta-courses allow to get users automatically enroled in a general course (the metacourse) when enroled in any of the metacourse-linked courses&lt;br /&gt;
* New tool to copy content from a course to other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New blocks&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML block: allowing to place arbitrary content (text, images links) in any course mainpage&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote RSS feed: allows to display external news channels inside a Moodle course&lt;br /&gt;
* Glossary Selection: to choose and display content from a Moodle glossary in course mainpage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Calendar&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Major speed improvements for sites with a large number of courses using groups&lt;br /&gt;
* Repeating events can now be modified or deleted all at the same time or separately as before&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;remember filter settings&amp;quot; preference that allows calendar filters to remember their status between logins&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity module improvements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Completely refactored into a new class-based design, allowing new plugin-assignment types&lt;br /&gt;
* New Online Text assignment type that doesn&#039;t require files and allows inline comments when grading - this new type effectively replaces the old Journal module&lt;br /&gt;
* Vastly improved grading interface for handling large classes&lt;br /&gt;
* New configuration options to disable late submission and to e-mail alerts to teachers when students submit new work&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chat&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Streamlined interface looks smoother, works faster, even without using the optional server daemon&lt;br /&gt;
* Blocks can now be added to chat pages (e.g. for additional information)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rewritten to allow any number of choices&lt;br /&gt;
* The number of users per choice can be limited, which allows it to be used as tool for &amp;quot;signing up&amp;quot; to an array of options.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now download the results of the choice to XLS or a TXT file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Forum&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Powerful new Google-like forum searching tools&lt;br /&gt;
* Forum read/unread tracking - unread messages are highlighted on the course page, forum page, discussion listing and the discussion view&lt;br /&gt;
* The tracking system may be disabled by teachers/users&lt;br /&gt;
* User profiles show all posts by a user, as well as all discussions&lt;br /&gt;
* When admins edit user messages, a notice is attached&lt;br /&gt;
* Discussion listing shows the last user who posted to each discussion and when it was, with a direct link to that post&lt;br /&gt;
* In group-enabled forums the discussion listing shows the group the thread applies to, with a link to the group description page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Glossary&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* New setting to enable/disable the print view of each glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
* New search system looks for words everywhere (instead of doing exact phrase match).&lt;br /&gt;
* More information is sent to logs to be able to track activity better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Journal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The Journal module has not changed since 1.4, and is now deprecated. The upgrade procedure will convert all your Journal activities into Online Assignments, and hide all the old Journal activities. If you don&#039;t want this to happen, then define this in your config.php: $CFG-&amp;gt;noconvertjournals = true;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Now supports timed Lessons&lt;br /&gt;
* Can create practice Lessons (grades are not stored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Option for students to view points earned while taking the Lesson&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow students to review their answers before submitting the Lesson&lt;br /&gt;
* New Slide Show Mode (only branch tables are displayed as slides)&lt;br /&gt;
* New Left Menu (for enabled branch tables only)&lt;br /&gt;
* Lessons can now be Password Protected&lt;br /&gt;
* A Tree View can be used for the Lesson creation screen&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can post their high scores&lt;br /&gt;
* New option to save a Lesson&#039;s settings as defaults for new lessons in the same course&lt;br /&gt;
* Can delete a student&#039;s attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* New page Jumps:&lt;br /&gt;
** Previous Page&lt;br /&gt;
** Unseen question within a branch&lt;br /&gt;
** Random question within a branch&lt;br /&gt;
** Unseen question within a cluster&lt;br /&gt;
* Added functionality to view Lesson statistics&lt;br /&gt;
* New question type: Essay. Teachers can view each essay and write comments, assign a grade, and then email it all to the student&lt;br /&gt;
* New question creation interface&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Can handle adaptive questions, i.e., questions that allow the student to interact with them repeatedly within the same quiz attempt and that can change in response to student answers.&lt;br /&gt;
* Student can be allowed to try a question again immediately within the same quiz attempt until they get the answer right.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a penalty mechanism that deducts a specified fraction of the mark for each wrong attempt at a question.&lt;br /&gt;
* Allows questions rendered and scored externally (e.g., by mathematical assessment engines) to be integrated seamlessly into Moodle quizzes via the RQP web services protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
* Is prepared for the handling of IMS QTI questions once web services for these become available.&lt;br /&gt;
* New tabbed teacher interface for previewing, editing, and reviewing quizzes.&lt;br /&gt;
* New &amp;quot;improved security&amp;quot; mode shows quiz in a separate full-screen window, with many browser features disabled&lt;br /&gt;
* Quizzes can be presented to students in several pages. The number of questions per page is selectable by the teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
* Blocks can now be added to quiz pages (to show results table, or additional information etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* Better and cleaner interface for question selection and management in the database. Selected questions can be added to quiz, moved to other categories or deleted en mass.&lt;br /&gt;
* Random questions are now added to the quiz question list with a dedicated button, leaving a cleaner interface at questions database without phantom placeholders&lt;br /&gt;
* Final grade can be a fractional number, with teacher-defined decimal figures&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved results page with user-selectable display of columns, cleaner sorting and new mark display options&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions can be edited with one click from the improved quiz preview and question preview screens.&lt;br /&gt;
* Questions can be copied with one click, to allow question variations to be created with ease.&lt;br /&gt;
* Revamped question categories structures and editing interface.&lt;br /&gt;
* Categories now can contain nested subcategories and can be re-ordered.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is possible to select whether questions from categories, and or their subcategories are displayed on the question edit page.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is now possible to select whether to add random questions from a parent category alone, or from a parent category and its sub-categories.&lt;br /&gt;
* Quiz creators are prevented from changing the question set of quizes that have had student responses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Recognition, and rejection, of overlapping/redundant questions has been improved.&lt;br /&gt;
* The display of questions in longer quiz categories on the quiz editing page is now paginated.&lt;br /&gt;
* New export types - IMS QTI (2.0) and xhtml. Improvements &amp;amp; fixes to others.&lt;br /&gt;
* New import type - Hot Potato. Improvements &amp;amp; fixes to others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scorm&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The module is now fully conformant with the SCORM 1.2 standard.&lt;br /&gt;
* User result data storage and reporting was improved.&lt;br /&gt;
* AICC packages can now be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Survey&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Graph formatting has been improved (labels are more readable)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wiki&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Changes to wiki pages are now monitored and displayed in Recent Activity block&lt;br /&gt;
* Several under the hood improvements to backup/restore and other routines that enhance the reliability of wikis&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Old releases|1.4.5 release notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Core]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Administrator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[pt:Versões do Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Notas de versiones]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Notes de mise à jour]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Assignment_activity&amp;diff=16684</id>
		<title>Assignment activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Assignment_activity&amp;diff=16684"/>
		<updated>2006-10-06T16:40:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Contrib modules */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Assignments}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; allow the teacher to grade various types of student submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Types==&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle supports plug-in assignment types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Official types===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three official types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Upload&lt;br /&gt;
:A student can upload a single file. This could be a Word document, spreadsheet or anything digital. Multiple files could be zipped and then submitted.&lt;br /&gt;
;Online Text&lt;br /&gt;
:This assignment type asks users to edit a text, using the normal editing tools. Teachers can grade them online, and even add inline comments or changes.&lt;br /&gt;
;Offline assignment&lt;br /&gt;
:This is useful when the assignment is performed outside of Moodle. It could be something elsewhere on the web or face-to-face. Students can see a description of the assignment, but can&#039;t upload files or anything. Grading works normally, and students will get notifications of their grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Contrib modules===&lt;br /&gt;
These assignment types have been contributed by users:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=30613 Group Assignment] (by Patrick Jermann)&lt;br /&gt;
:One user uploads the file but all the members of his or her group &amp;quot;benefit&amp;quot; from the submission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=33940 uploadmulti] (by Brian Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
:Allows uploading multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=39979 Multiple Files Upload] (by Gustav W Delius)&lt;br /&gt;
:Allows uploading multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;[http://cdc.humboldt.edu/moodle/mod/resource/view.php?id=21 Review assignment] (by Humboldt State University)&lt;br /&gt;
:A new assignment type that adds the ability to send back to the student a graded copy of their file. For Moodle 1.5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=34887 Form] (by Michael Robellard)&lt;br /&gt;
:allows students to enter information in a form (multiple textarea boxes) and then the teacher can grade each textarea with a number of points (or other grading scale) and give a comment for each form field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://download.moodle.org/docs/using_moodle/ch7_assignments.pdf Using Moodle Chapter 7: Assignments and Exercises]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment - Read Only Personal Report Access for Students ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Use to provide access to secure personalised student information such as reports.  (Needs to be moved to a seperate page - How ??)&lt;br /&gt;
* Using &amp;quot;Upload a single file&amp;quot; Assignment to provide individual report access for students:&lt;br /&gt;
* Create report files commencing with the moodle user code (easier to create correct &amp;quot;batch&amp;quot; command file with code at start of filename)&lt;br /&gt;
* Create pdf files from all reports (pdf&#039;s with the right security settings reduce the likelihood of tampering with final reports cf. other editable files)&lt;br /&gt;
* Open moodle database table mdl_user and copy the fields id and username to a spreadsheet file for manipulation e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
** 2 admin&lt;br /&gt;
** 3 tsp80902&lt;br /&gt;
** 4 che&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a spreadsheet formula to construct the correct command lines to create a folder with the moodle id and move the file starting with the matching username into the new folder:&lt;br /&gt;
** e.g. for Excel in a Windows environment use :   =&amp;quot;mkdir&amp;quot;&amp;amp;A2&amp;amp;&amp;quot;CarraigeReturn&amp;quot;&amp;amp;&amp;quot;move &amp;quot;&amp;amp;B2&amp;amp;&amp;quot;_2006_MidSem2.pdf &amp;quot;&amp;amp;A2&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir2CarraigeReturnmove admin_2006_MidSem2.pdf 2&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir3CarraigeReturnmove tsp80902_2006_MidSem2.pdf 3&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir4CarraigeReturnmove che_2006_MidSem2.pdf 4&lt;br /&gt;
* Use an editor to replace the &amp;quot;CarraigeReturn&amp;quot; marker with a real carraige return, and insert a space after the &amp;quot;mkdir&amp;quot; command:&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir 2&lt;br /&gt;
** move admin_2006_MidSem2.pdf 2&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir 3&lt;br /&gt;
** move tsp80902_2006_MidSem2.pdf 3&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir 4&lt;br /&gt;
** move che_2006_MidSem2.pdf 4&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to the course where you want to add the documents and note the course id from the URL displayed in the browser:&lt;br /&gt;
** e.g. http://infonet.cheltsec.vic.edu.au/course/view.php?id=5&lt;br /&gt;
* Create an &amp;quot;Upload a single file&amp;quot; Assignment in moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* Upload an marker file for yourself as a test.&lt;br /&gt;
* Update the assignment witht the &amp;quot;available&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;due&amp;quot; dates in the past (so students cannot upload their own amended report !) and check the &amp;quot;Prevent Late Submissions&amp;quot; box.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a file explorer to go to the moodledata folder and look for this course, then open moddate (module data) and open the last assignment.  You should see a folder created with your id that should contain the marker file that you uploaded.&lt;br /&gt;
* Paste all the files that you want to allow studenst to access in the assignment folder:&lt;br /&gt;
** e.g. \\infonet\c$\Webstore\moodledata\5\moddata\assignment\112&lt;br /&gt;
* Paste the batch file in the dame folder&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a line at the start of the batch file to make it start in the correct physical network folder when it starts making new folders: e.g. &lt;br /&gt;
** net use /d R: &lt;br /&gt;
** net use R: \\infonet\c$\Webstore\moodledata\5\moddata\assignment\125&lt;br /&gt;
** cd /d R:\&lt;br /&gt;
* the final batch command file should look like:&lt;br /&gt;
** net use /d R: &lt;br /&gt;
** net use R: \\infonet\c$\Webstore\moodledata\5\moddata\assignment\125&lt;br /&gt;
** cd /d R:\&lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir 9&lt;br /&gt;
** move bou0010_2006_MidSem2.pdf 9 &lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir 10&lt;br /&gt;
** move wol0002_2006_MidSem2.pdf 10 &lt;br /&gt;
** mkdir 11&lt;br /&gt;
** etc.....&lt;br /&gt;
* Run the batch file, and the folders will be created as if the students had uploaded their own reports themselves.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Open moodle database table mdl_assignment_submissions and copy the database record of your marker file as a template.&lt;br /&gt;
** e.g  id=11823;  assignment=125  userid = 6; timecreated = 1157503128 ;  timemodified = 1157503128 ; numfiles=1 data1=(blank) data2=(blank) grade=-1 comment=(blank) format=0;  teacher=0;  timemarked=0; mailed=0 &lt;br /&gt;
* Paste the record into a spreadsheet and then paste the list of moodle id&#039;s under the userid field;  increment the mdl_assignmnet id by one for every user; fill down the same assignment number and all other fields: e.g.&lt;br /&gt;
** 11823 125 6 1157503128 1157503128 1 -1 0 0 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
** 11824 125 2 1157503128 1157503128 1 -1 0 0 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
** 11825 125 3 1157503128 1157503128 1 -1 0 0 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
** 11826 125 4 1157503128 1157503128 1 -1 0 0 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
** 11827 125 5 1157503128 1157503128 1 -1 0 0 0 0&lt;br /&gt;
** 11828 125 6 1157503128 1157503128 1 -1 0 0 0 0 &lt;br /&gt;
* These records ensure that the database &amp;quot;knows&amp;quot; that there are documents already submitted into the assignment so that students can read but not change the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Devoir]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[nl:Opdracht]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:作业模块]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=13616</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=13616"/>
		<updated>2006-07-31T16:12:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* The Flash card lesson */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in interesting and flexible ways. It consists of a number of pages. Each page leads to another page. Students are given content and choices which determine the next page they see. The question page is the most common type. It has content which ends with a question and the page shows a number of possible answers. The student&#039;s answer choice determines the next page they see. Branch tables are another type of page where students see content and can choose to move to different parts of the lesson by labeled buttons. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex and depends upon the structure of the material being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson can create a series of pages which can be presented in a linear fashion, like a slide show, or in a non-linear, branching manner, or a combination of the two.  A student&#039;s choice will send them to any page that the teacher selects.  For example, a particular answer might send the student back in the lesson for a review, while another answer will advance the student to a new page.  The lesson can be graded with the use of questions, or ungraded and used simply as a resource of pages or a combination of both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two basic modes: presentation and flash card.  Most of the descriptions of a lesson in this document are about the presentation mode and the use of questions.   The Flash Card section describes how to make lesson pages appear randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Presentation Lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson activity includes many features to make cheating more difficult and the content more interesting through question clustering, password protection, and time limits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By mixing content with questions, lesson enables you to implement the Practice Principle of eLearning (see Clark and Mayer, 2004), where practice is integrated with instructional material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is made up of pages. Pages can consist of either &amp;quot;Branch Tables&amp;quot; or Question pages. Branch tables are for delivering content without a question, and can link to any other branch table or question in the Lesson. Each question page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each question page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it is the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses (or &#039;&#039;feedback messages&#039;&#039;). Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer, that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) Responses can be short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. When responses are left blank, the Lesson module shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a test. You may want to show students just a Continue link and take them to the next page in the lesson. To do this, choose the &#039;Multiple choice&#039; tab, and leave all Answers and Responses blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information about [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Lesson_Pages pages]. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers, the familiar multiple choice question. Each answer can receive an individual response from the teacher before sending the student (with a jump setting) to view the same or another page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As will be seen later, there are two ways to grade a lesson. In one method, the direction students are sent in the logical order of pages determines if the answer was correct or wrong for grading purposes. Usually a correct answer advances the student in the logical order and wrong answers send the students back to the question page or back in the logical order. The other method uses an answer&#039;s score to calculate the grade. Usually a correct answer receives a score of 1, any wrong answer receive a score 0. It is possible to give a negative score or partial credit for any answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a question page is added, the jumps have a default setting. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page and it is a good practice to keep this as a right answer. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. The score for the first answer is 1 and for the rest 0. These settings can be changed by editing the question. Remember the order of the answers is going to be random each time a student enters the question page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then each answer has a point value associated with it. Next we will discuss grading a student&#039;s lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It is the number of correct answers divided by the number of question pages seen. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then the grading algorithm changes.  Instead of the above, the grade is based on earned points by the user, which is divided by the total points possible. The teacher can assign a score for each responce, this can be a negative or 0 (zero) or a positive number.  Usually the score is 0 for a wrong answer and 1 for a correct answer.  The point values associated with each of the user&#039;s answers are added up. That is then divided by the total of the maximum points that the user could have earned for each page answered. This number is then scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter content into the first page. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages in front or after that page.  Once a question or branch page have been created, they can be edited by the teacher at any time.  When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher also has the option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson will normally cover a limited amount of material. A topic or week might contain many lessons. Lessons are shown to the student in the home page for the course within &amp;quot;weeks&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;topics&amp;quot;, and/or in the activity block when it is part of the course home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with any lesson, it is a good idea to have a plan before starting the presentation.   Simple lessons that basically go from the start to the end in a straight line path, one page after the other, can be created from an outline. More complicated lessons require more planning.  The good news is that a teacher can create a simple lesson and then based upon feedback and performance,  can add refinements or complexity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_question_page]]- more help on adding question pages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_branch_table]] - more help on adding branch pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}} [[Image:Question_type_tabs.GIF]]  &lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is expected to answer with one word or a few words. The &#039;&#039;student&#039;s answer&#039;&#039; is checked against one or more &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; which are entered by the teacher in a question&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field on the Edit Question Page screen. These &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; can be either correct or wrong. Each &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; can optionally have a &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; (= a &#039;&#039;feedback&#039;&#039; message). If no &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; is entered by the teacher for an &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; then the default &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered by the student does not match any of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; then the student&#039;s answer is considered wrong and the student is shown the default &#039;&#039;wrong response&#039;&#039; feedback message.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Starting with Moodle 1.6&#039;&#039;&#039;, there are two different &#039;&#039;student answer&#039;&#039; analysis systems available for the Short Answer type of question: the &#039;&#039;&#039;simple system &#039;&#039;&#039;is used by default; the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regular Expressions system&#039;&#039;&#039; is used if the &amp;quot;Use Regular Expressions&amp;quot; option box has been checked on the Edit Question Page screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Simple analysis ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the (default) simple system of analysis, the comparisons ignore the case of the text. The asterisk (*) character can be used in answers as a &amp;quot;wild card&amp;quot; character. It stands for any number of characters (including no characters at all). For example, the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;longer&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longest&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;long&amp;quot;. Please note, however, that the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; will also match &amp;quot;longing&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longer than yours&amp;quot; and so forth. If a &amp;quot;wild card&amp;quot; type of student answer analysis is required, it is strongly recommended to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;regular expressions&#039;&#039;&#039; analysis system explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
The matching process goes through the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; in the order they appear on the Edit screen. Once a match is found the process stops and the corresponding result (and &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; message, if present) is returned. So, if for example the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; are &amp;quot;Longest&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; (in that order), the &#039;&#039;student&#039;s answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;longer&amp;quot; will match the second &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; and, in this case, the third &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;, although a match, is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
If one of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; is just &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; (a single *) this &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; will match anything. This is used as the last &amp;quot;catch-all&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;. You will use this &amp;quot;catch-all&amp;quot; asterisk if you want to provide the student with your own &amp;quot;wrong answer&amp;quot; feedback message instead of the default system &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; message (or the equivalent in your own language pack).&lt;br /&gt;
If an asterisk (*) is actually needed in an &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;, you&#039;ll have to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regular Expressions&#039;&#039;&#039; analysis system and enter the asterisk as \*, backslash asterisk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Regular Expressions analysis ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This system gives you access to a more powerful but more complicated system for analysing the student&#039;s answers. For a complete introduction to Regular Expressions, see these sites http://www.zend.com/zend/tut/tutorial-delin2.php regular-expressions or http://rezeau.org/eao/developpement/expandRegexpToString.htm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct answer matching a regular expression pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to give complete examples of the vast possibilities offered by this system, and the following are just some possibilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Suppose your question is &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:In the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field you type this regular expression: &amp;quot;it’s blue, white(,| and) red/i&amp;quot;. This will match any of those four student answers:&lt;br /&gt;
*it’s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
*it’s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
*It’s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
*It’s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; By default a regular expression match is case sensitive; to make the match case insensitive you must add the /i parameter right at the end of your expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 2.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;What is blue, or red, or yellow?&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;(|it&#039;s )a colou?r&amp;quot;. This will match:&lt;br /&gt;
*a colour&lt;br /&gt;
*a color&lt;br /&gt;
*it&#039;s a colour&lt;br /&gt;
*it&#039;s a color&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; The beginning of this regular expression &amp;quot;(|it&#039;s )&amp;quot; will match either nothing or &amp;quot;it&#039;s &amp;quot; (i.e. &amp;quot;it&#039;s&amp;quot; followed by a space). The ? (question-mark) means: preceding character zero or one time; it is used here to match British English as well as US spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel a&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;[bcr]at&amp;quot;. This will match: &lt;br /&gt;
*bat&lt;br /&gt;
*cat&lt;br /&gt;
*rat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting missing required words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regular expressions alone cannot detect absent character strings, so you have to add a little code in your Answer field to take care of this. Any &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; which begins with a double hyphen will analyse the &#039;&#039;student’s answer&#039;&#039; to find out whether the following string is present or absent. If present, the analysis continues to the next question; if absent, the analysis stops and the relevant Response message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; --.*blue.*/i&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;student answer:&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;it&#039;s red and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; The color of the sky is missing!&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Jump 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the &#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039; (dot character) stands for “any character” and the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039; (asterisk) means “preceding special character repeated any number of times”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; regular expression above means: check whether the character string “blue”, preceded by anything and followed by anything is &#039;&#039;absent&#039;&#039; from the student&#039;s answer. Please note that the use of the asterisk is different in the Simple analysis system and in the Regular Expressions system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;--[b|c|r]&amp;quot;. Response: &amp;quot;Your answer should start with one of these letters: &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;c&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;r&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting unwanted (incorrect) words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may want to detect, in the student&#039;s answer, the presence of one or several words which should be not be there (because they are wrong) and to single them out with a specific response. To do this, just start the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field with a double plus sign (++).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 6.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; ++(yellow|black|orange|green|black|pink)/i&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;student answer:&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;it&#039;s blue, orange and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; One or more colors are wrong!&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Jump:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; If any of these (wrong) color names is detected in the student’s answer, then the negative feedback message (&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;) will be displayed &#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039; the wrong strings will be colored red (or the color of the &#039;&#039;.incorrect&#039;&#039; class will be used if it exists in a CSS stylesheet of your current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 7.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel a&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;++hat&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;You might wear one made of an animal&#039;s skin, but a hat can&#039;t be considered as an animal.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Escaping special characters=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to use characters which are part of the regular expressions set of special characters, you need to &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them (i.e. precede them with a backslash). E.g. if you want to accept the answer &amp;quot;My computer cost 1000$&amp;quot;, you must write the regular expression as &amp;quot;My computer cost 1000\$&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 The special characters which must be escaped are .^$*()[]+?|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Order of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Because the program tries to match the student&#039;s answer with the teacher&#039;s &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;in the order of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; fields&#039;&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;order&#039;&#039; of those &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; is of the greatest importance. The best analysis system will be achieved by a careful combination of regular expressions and order of &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039;. Of course, any question programed with the Regular expressions system will have to be thoroughly tested by the teacher before being released in a Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====NOTE====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when - as a teacher - you &#039;&#039;preview&#039;&#039; a lesson, your attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against another list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists &amp;quot;Canada, Italy, Japan&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Ottawa, Rome, Tokyo&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical.&lt;br /&gt;
*For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists &amp;quot;Ant, Cow, Dog, Sparrow&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Insect, Mammal, Mammal, Bird&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.5}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 1.5.-&#039;&#039;&#039; When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 1.6.-&#039;&#039;&#039;When the student successfully matches the items, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct answer jump&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrong answer jump&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. The question supports only 2 response (= feedback) messages: the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; message is displayed if all matches are correct, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrong response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; message otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the &#039;&#039;Multichoice question&#039;&#039; where the choices are shown in a random order, the first list of items in a &#039;&#039;Matching question&#039;&#039; is not shuffled but shown in the same order as entered. This allows for &amp;quot;Ordered&amp;quot; questions to be constructed. Consider the question &amp;quot; Put the following into the order they were born, the earliest first&amp;quot; with the lists &amp;quot;1., 2., 3., 4.&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Longfellow, Lawrence, Lowell, Larkin&amp;quot;. The second list is shuffed before being used in the question, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately this question differs from the numerical quiz question and the numerical embedded question (Cloze) in a couple of ways. 3:4 in those questions means &amp;quot;3 plus or minus 4&amp;quot;, in other words from -1 to 7. The embedded question doesn&#039;t support interval boundaries. The numerical question, if imported in GIFT format, can use &amp;quot;3..4&amp;quot; as the interval from 3 to 4. Another difference is that those questions accept , as decimal in student answers, but the lesson numerical question doesn&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions were introduced in Moodle version 1.5. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. They look similar to question pages. They have a title, content section, student choices and jumps that the student selects by their choice. There is no score for a student&#039;s choice.  Branch tables also have some special uses.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table can effectively divide the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Jumps special navigation page] which, by default at its creation, returns the student back to the preceding branch table as an absolute jump. However like any other jump, the &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be set to anywhere in the lesson. Be careful, if another branch page is added, the End of Branch jump will not change. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)  Also branch tables can be used instead of question pages.  For example, a series of pages with information that continue to the next page, with the series ending with a question page about the content which was just covered.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the lesson setting &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables and you are not using custom scoring (where you enter a point value for each question) it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown pages (cards) in  random order.  Usually these are question pages. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a series of cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the Flash Card mode of presentation, setting the jumps is important. A correct answer jump should point to the Next Page, a wrong answer should stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson Flash Card mode is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. And Further extra text can be included with each question in the Flash Card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Linking and Dependencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dependency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows this current lesson to be dependent upon a students performance in another lesson that is in the same course. If the performance requirement(s) is not met, then the student will not be able to access this lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Conditions for the dependency include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Time Spent: the student must spend this set amount of time in the required lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Completed: the student must complete the required lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Grade better than: the student must earn a grade in the required lesson that is better than the one specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any combination of the above can be used if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Link to an Activity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activity Link&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The drop-down menu contains all of the activities for this course. If one is selected, then a link to that activity will appear at the end of the Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://download.moodle.org/docs/using_moodle/ch10_lessons.pdf Using Moodle Chapter 10: Lessons]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://moodle.tokem.fi/ Go to teacher&#039;s manual, Lesson] link in June 2006 upgrading manuals to 1.6 from 1.5.3 . Good supplement to MoodleDocs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=12329</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=12329"/>
		<updated>2006-06-22T18:09:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Pages, questions, answers and responses */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in interesting and flexible ways. It consists of a number of pages. Each page leads to another page. Students are given content and choices which determine the next page they see. The question page is the most common type. It has content which ends with a question and the page shows a number of possible answers. The student&#039;s answer choice determines the next page they see. Branch tables are another type of page where students see content and can choose to move to different parts of the lesson by labeled buttons. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex and depends upon the structure of the material being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson can create a series of pages which can be presented in a linear fashion, like a slide show, or in a non-linear, branching manner, or a combination of the two.  A student&#039;s choice will send them to any page that the teacher selects.  For example, a particular answer might send the student back in the lesson for a review, while another answer will advance the student to a new page.  The lesson can be graded with the use of questions, or ungraded and used simply as a resource of pages or a combination of both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two basic modes: presentation and flash card.  Most of the descriptions of a lesson in this document are about the presentation mode and the use of questions.   The Flash Card section describes how to make lesson pages appear randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Presentation Lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson activity includes many features to make cheating more difficult and the content more interesting through question clustering, password protection, and time limits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By mixing content with questions, lesson enables you to implement the Practice Principle of eLearning (see Clark and Mayer, 2004), where practice is integrated with instructional material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is made up of pages. Pages can consist of either &amp;quot;Branch Tables&amp;quot; or Question pages. Branch tables are for delivering content without a question, and can link to any other branch table or question in the Lesson. Each question page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each question page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it is the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses (or &#039;&#039;feedback messages&#039;&#039;). Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer, that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) Responses can be short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. When responses are left blank, the Lesson module shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a test. You may want to show students just a Continue link and take them to the next page in the lesson. To do this, choose the &#039;Multiple choice&#039; tab, and leave all Answers and Responses blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information about [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Lesson_Pages pages]. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers, the familiar multiple choice question. Each answer can receive an individual response from the teacher before sending the student (with a jump setting) to view the same or another page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As will be seen later, there are two ways to grade a lesson. In one method, the direction students are sent in the logical order of pages determines if the answer was correct or wrong for grading purposes. Usually a correct answer advances the student in the logical order and wrong answers send the students back to the question page or back in the logical order. The other method uses an answer&#039;s score to calculate the grade. Usually a correct answer receives a score of 1, any wrong answer receive a score 0. It is possible to give a negative score or partial credit for any answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a question page is added, the jumps have a default setting. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page and it is a good practice to keep this as a right answer. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. The score for the first answer is 1 and for the rest 0. These settings can be changed by editing the question. Remember the order of the answers is going to be random each time a student enters the question page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then each answer has a point value associated with it. Next we will discuss grading a student&#039;s lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It is the number of correct answers divided by the number of question pages seen. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then the grading algorithm changes.  Instead of the above, the grade is based on earned points by the user, which is divided by the total points possible. The teacher can assign a score for each responce, this can be a negative or 0 (zero) or a positive number.  Usually the score is 0 for a wrong answer and 1 for a correct answer.  The point values associated with each of the user&#039;s answers are added up. That is then divided by the total of the maximum points that the user could have earned for each page answered. This number is then scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter content into the first page. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages in front or after that page.  Once a question or branch page have been created, they can be edited by the teacher at any time.  When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher also has the option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson will normally cover a limited amount of material. A topic or week might contain many lessons. Lessons are shown to the student in the home page for the course within &amp;quot;weeks&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;topics&amp;quot;, and/or in the activity block when it is part of the course home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with any lesson, it is a good idea to have a plan before starting the presentation.   Simple lessons that basically go from the start to the end in a straight line path, one page after the other, can be created from an outline. More complicated lessons require more planning.  The good news is that a teacher can create a simple lesson and then based upon feedback and performance,  can add refinements or complexity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_question_page]]- more help on adding question pages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_branch_table]] - more help on adding branch pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}} [[Image:Question_type_tabs.GIF]]  &lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is expected to answer with one word or a few words. The &#039;&#039;student&#039;s answer&#039;&#039; is checked against one or more &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; which are entered by the teacher in a question&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field on the Edit Question Page screen. These &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; can be either correct or wrong. Each &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; can optionally have a &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; (= a &#039;&#039;feedback&#039;&#039; message). If no &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; is entered by the teacher for an &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; then the default &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered by the student does not match any of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; then the student&#039;s answer is considered wrong and the student is shown the default &#039;&#039;wrong response&#039;&#039; feedback message.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Starting with Moodle 1.6&#039;&#039;&#039;, there are two different &#039;&#039;student answer&#039;&#039; analysis systems available for the Short Answer type of question: the &#039;&#039;&#039;simple system &#039;&#039;&#039;is used by default; the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regular Expressions system&#039;&#039;&#039; is used if the &amp;quot;Use Regular Expressions&amp;quot; option box has been checked on the Edit Question Page screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Simple analysis ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the (default) simple system of analysis, the comparisons ignore the case of the text. The asterisk (*) character can be used in answers as a &amp;quot;wild card&amp;quot; character. It stands for any number of characters (including no characters at all). For example, the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;longer&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longest&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;long&amp;quot;. Please note, however, that the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; will also match &amp;quot;longing&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longer than yours&amp;quot; and so forth. If a &amp;quot;wild card&amp;quot; type of student answer analysis is required, it is strongly recommended to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;regular expressions&#039;&#039;&#039; analysis system explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
The matching process goes through the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; in the order they appear on the Edit screen. Once a match is found the process stops and the corresponding result (and &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; message, if present) is returned. So, if for example the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; are &amp;quot;Longest&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; (in that order), the &#039;&#039;student&#039;s answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;longer&amp;quot; will match the second &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; and, in this case, the third &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;, although a match, is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
If one of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; is just &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; (a single *) this &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; will match anything. This is used as the last &amp;quot;catch-all&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;. You will use this &amp;quot;catch-all&amp;quot; asterisk if you want to provide the student with your own &amp;quot;wrong answer&amp;quot; feedback message instead of the default system &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; message (or the equivalent in your own language pack).&lt;br /&gt;
If an asterisk (*) is actually needed in an &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;, you&#039;ll have to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regular Expressions&#039;&#039;&#039; analysis system and enter the asterisk as \*, backslash asterisk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Regular Expressions analysis ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This system gives you access to a more powerful but more complicated system for analysing the student&#039;s answers. For a complete introduction to Regular Expressions, see these sites http://www.zend.com/zend/tut/tutorial-delin2.php regular-expressions or http://rezeau.org/eao/developpement/expandRegexpToString.htm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct answer matching a regular expression pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to give complete examples of the vast possibilities offered by this system, and the following are just some possibilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Suppose your question is &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:In the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field you type this regular expression: &amp;quot;it’s blue, white(,| and) red/i&amp;quot;. This will match any of those four student answers:&lt;br /&gt;
*it’s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
*it’s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
*It’s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
*It’s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; By default a regular expression match is case sensitive; to make the match case insensitive you must add the /i parameter right at the end of your expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 2.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;What is blue, or red, or yellow?&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;(|it&#039;s )a colou?r&amp;quot;. This will match:&lt;br /&gt;
*a colour&lt;br /&gt;
*a color&lt;br /&gt;
*it&#039;s a colour&lt;br /&gt;
*it&#039;s a color&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; The beginning of this regular expression &amp;quot;(|it&#039;s )&amp;quot; will match either nothing or &amp;quot;it&#039;s &amp;quot; (i.e. &amp;quot;it&#039;s&amp;quot; followed by a space). The ? (question-mark) means: preceding character zero or one time; it is used here to match British English as well as US spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel a&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;[bcr]at&amp;quot;. This will match: &lt;br /&gt;
*bat&lt;br /&gt;
*cat&lt;br /&gt;
*rat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting missing required words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regular expressions alone cannot detect absent character strings, so you have to add a little code in your Answer field to take care of this. Any &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; which begins with a double hyphen will analyse the &#039;&#039;student’s answer&#039;&#039; to find out whether the following string is present or absent. If present, the analysis continues to the next question; if absent, the analysis stops and the relevant Response message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; --.*blue.*/i&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;student answer:&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;it&#039;s red and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; The color of the sky is missing!&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Jump 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the &#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039; (dot character) stands for “any character” and the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039; (asterisk) means “preceding special character repeated any number of times”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; regular expression above means: check whether the character string “blue”, preceded by anything and followed by anything is &#039;&#039;absent&#039;&#039; from the student&#039;s answer. Please note that the use of the asterisk is different in the Simple analysis system and in the Regular Expressions system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;--[b|c|r]&amp;quot;. Response: &amp;quot;Your answer should start with one of these letters: &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;c&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;r&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting unwanted (incorrect) words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may want to detect, in the student&#039;s answer, the presence of one or several words which should be not be there (because they are wrong) and to single them out with a specific response. To do this, just start the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field with a double plus sign (++).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 6.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; ++(yellow|black|orange|green|black|pink)/i&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;student answer:&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;it&#039;s blue, orange and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; One or more colors are wrong!&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Jump:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; If any of these (wrong) color names is detected in the student’s answer, then the negative feedback message (&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;) will be displayed &#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039; the wrong strings will be colored red (or the color of the &#039;&#039;.incorrect&#039;&#039; class will be used if it exists in a CSS stylesheet of your current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 7.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel a&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;++hat&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;You might wear one made of an animal&#039;s skin, but a hat can&#039;t be considered as an animal.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Escaping special characters=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to use characters which are part of the regular expressions set of special characters, you need to &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them (i.e. precede them with a backslash). E.g. if you want to accept the answer &amp;quot;My computer cost 1000$&amp;quot;, you must write the regular expression as &amp;quot;My computer cost 1000\$&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 The special characters which must be escaped are .^$*()[]+?|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Order of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Because the program tries to match the student&#039;s answer with the teacher&#039;s &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;in the order of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; fields&#039;&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;order&#039;&#039; of those &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; is of the greatest importance. The best analysis system will be achieved by a careful combination of regular expressions and order of &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039;. Of course, any question programed with the Regular expressions system will have to be thoroughly tested by the teacher before being released in a Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====NOTE====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when - as a teacher - you &#039;&#039;preview&#039;&#039; a lesson, your attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against another list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists &amp;quot;Canada, Italy, Japan&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Ottawa, Rome, Tokyo&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical.&lt;br /&gt;
*For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists &amp;quot;Ant, Cow, Dog, Sparrow&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Insect, Mammal, Mammal, Bird&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.5}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 1.5.-&#039;&#039;&#039; When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 1.6.-&#039;&#039;&#039;When the student successfully matches the items, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct answer jump&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrong answer jump&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. The question supports only 2 response (= feedback) messages: the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; message is displayed if all matches are correct, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrong response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; message otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the &#039;&#039;Multichoice question&#039;&#039; where the choices are shown in a random order, the first list of items in a &#039;&#039;Matching question&#039;&#039; is not shuffled but shown in the same order as entered. This allows for &amp;quot;Ordered&amp;quot; questions to be constructed. Consider the question &amp;quot; Put the following into the order they were born, the earliest first&amp;quot; with the lists &amp;quot;1., 2., 3., 4.&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Longfellow, Lawrence, Lowell, Larkin&amp;quot;. The second list is shuffed before being used in the question, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately this question differs from the numerical quiz question and the numerical embedded question (Cloze) in a couple of ways. 3:4 in those questions means &amp;quot;3 plus or minus 4&amp;quot;, in other words from -1 to 7. The embedded question doesn&#039;t support interval boundaries. The numerical question, if imported in GIFT format, can use &amp;quot;3..4&amp;quot; as the interval from 3 to 4. Another difference is that those questions accept , as decimal in student answers, but the lesson numerical question doesn&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions were introduced in Moodle version 1.5. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. They look similar to question pages. They have a title, content section, student choices and jumps that the student selects by their choice. There is no score for a student&#039;s choice.  Branch tables also have some special uses.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table can effectively divide the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Jumps special navigation page] which, by default, returns the student back to the preceding branch table. However like any other jump, the &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be set to anywhere in the lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)  Also branch tables can be used instead of question pages.  For example, a series of pages with information that continue to the next page, with the series ending with a question page about the content which was just covered.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the lesson setting &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables and you are not using custom scoring (where you enter a point value for each question) it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown pages (cards) in  random order.  Usually these are question pages. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a series of cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the Flash Card mode of presentation, setting the jumps is important. A correct answer jump should point to the Next Page, a wrong answer should stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson Flash Card mode is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. And Further extra text can be included with each question in the Flash Card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://download.moodle.org/docs/using_moodle/ch10_lessons.pdf Using Moodle Chapter 10: Lessons]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=12328</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=12328"/>
		<updated>2006-06-22T18:09:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Pages, questions, answers and responses */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in interesting and flexible ways. It consists of a number of pages. Each page leads to another page. Students are given content and choices which determine the next page they see. The question page is the most common type. It has content which ends with a question and the page shows a number of possible answers. The student&#039;s answer choice determines the next page they see. Branch tables are another type of page where students see content and can choose to move to different parts of the lesson by labeled buttons. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex and depends upon the structure of the material being presented&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson can create a series of pages which can be presented in a linear fashion, like a slide show, or in a non-linear, branching manner, or a combination of the two.  A student&#039;s choice will send them to any page that the teacher selects.  For example, a particular answer might send the student back in the lesson for a review, while another answer will advance the student to a new page.  The lesson can be graded with the use of questions, or ungraded and used simply as a resource of pages or a combination of both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two basic modes: presentation and flash card.  Most of the descriptions of a lesson in this document are about the presentation mode and the use of questions.   The Flash Card section describes how to make lesson pages appear randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Presentation Lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson activity includes many features to make cheating more difficult and the content more interesting through question clustering, password protection, and time limits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By mixing content with questions, lesson enables you to implement the Practice Principle of eLearning (see Clark and Mayer, 2004), where practice is integrated with instructional material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is made up of pages. Pages can consist of either &amp;quot;Branch Tables&amp;quot; or Question pages. Branch tables are for delivering content without a question, and can link to any other branch table or question in the Lesson. Each question page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it is the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses (or &#039;&#039;feedback messages&#039;&#039;). Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer, that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) Responses can be short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. When responses are left blank, the Lesson module shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a test. You may want to show students just a Continue link and take them to the next page in the lesson. To do this, choose the &#039;Multiple choice&#039; tab, and leave all Answers and Responses blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information about [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Lesson_Pages pages]. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers, the familiar multiple choice question. Each answer can receive an individual response from the teacher before sending the student (with a jump setting) to view the same or another page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As will be seen later, there are two ways to grade a lesson. In one method, the direction students are sent in the logical order of pages determines if the answer was correct or wrong for grading purposes. Usually a correct answer advances the student in the logical order and wrong answers send the students back to the question page or back in the logical order. The other method uses an answer&#039;s score to calculate the grade. Usually a correct answer receives a score of 1, any wrong answer receive a score 0. It is possible to give a negative score or partial credit for any answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a question page is added, the jumps have a default setting. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page and it is a good practice to keep this as a right answer. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. The score for the first answer is 1 and for the rest 0. These settings can be changed by editing the question. Remember the order of the answers is going to be random each time a student enters the question page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then each answer has a point value associated with it. Next we will discuss grading a student&#039;s lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It is the number of correct answers divided by the number of question pages seen. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then the grading algorithm changes.  Instead of the above, the grade is based on earned points by the user, which is divided by the total points possible. The teacher can assign a score for each responce, this can be a negative or 0 (zero) or a positive number.  Usually the score is 0 for a wrong answer and 1 for a correct answer.  The point values associated with each of the user&#039;s answers are added up. That is then divided by the total of the maximum points that the user could have earned for each page answered. This number is then scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter content into the first page. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages in front or after that page.  Once a question or branch page have been created, they can be edited by the teacher at any time.  When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher also has the option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson will normally cover a limited amount of material. A topic or week might contain many lessons. Lessons are shown to the student in the home page for the course within &amp;quot;weeks&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;topics&amp;quot;, and/or in the activity block when it is part of the course home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with any lesson, it is a good idea to have a plan before starting the presentation.   Simple lessons that basically go from the start to the end in a straight line path, one page after the other, can be created from an outline. More complicated lessons require more planning.  The good news is that a teacher can create a simple lesson and then based upon feedback and performance,  can add refinements or complexity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_question_page]]- more help on adding question pages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_branch_table]] - more help on adding branch pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}} [[Image:Question_type_tabs.GIF]]  &lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is expected to answer with one word or a few words. The &#039;&#039;student&#039;s answer&#039;&#039; is checked against one or more &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; which are entered by the teacher in a question&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field on the Edit Question Page screen. These &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; can be either correct or wrong. Each &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; can optionally have a &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; (= a &#039;&#039;feedback&#039;&#039; message). If no &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; is entered by the teacher for an &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; then the default &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered by the student does not match any of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; then the student&#039;s answer is considered wrong and the student is shown the default &#039;&#039;wrong response&#039;&#039; feedback message.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Starting with Moodle 1.6&#039;&#039;&#039;, there are two different &#039;&#039;student answer&#039;&#039; analysis systems available for the Short Answer type of question: the &#039;&#039;&#039;simple system &#039;&#039;&#039;is used by default; the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regular Expressions system&#039;&#039;&#039; is used if the &amp;quot;Use Regular Expressions&amp;quot; option box has been checked on the Edit Question Page screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Simple analysis ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the (default) simple system of analysis, the comparisons ignore the case of the text. The asterisk (*) character can be used in answers as a &amp;quot;wild card&amp;quot; character. It stands for any number of characters (including no characters at all). For example, the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;longer&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longest&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;long&amp;quot;. Please note, however, that the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; will also match &amp;quot;longing&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;longer than yours&amp;quot; and so forth. If a &amp;quot;wild card&amp;quot; type of student answer analysis is required, it is strongly recommended to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;regular expressions&#039;&#039;&#039; analysis system explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
The matching process goes through the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; in the order they appear on the Edit screen. Once a match is found the process stops and the corresponding result (and &#039;&#039;response&#039;&#039; message, if present) is returned. So, if for example the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; are &amp;quot;Longest&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Long*&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; (in that order), the &#039;&#039;student&#039;s answer&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;longer&amp;quot; will match the second &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; and, in this case, the third &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;, although a match, is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
If one of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; is just &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; (a single *) this &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; will match anything. This is used as the last &amp;quot;catch-all&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;. You will use this &amp;quot;catch-all&amp;quot; asterisk if you want to provide the student with your own &amp;quot;wrong answer&amp;quot; feedback message instead of the default system &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; message (or the equivalent in your own language pack).&lt;br /&gt;
If an asterisk (*) is actually needed in an &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039;, you&#039;ll have to use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regular Expressions&#039;&#039;&#039; analysis system and enter the asterisk as \*, backslash asterisk.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Regular Expressions analysis ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This system gives you access to a more powerful but more complicated system for analysing the student&#039;s answers. For a complete introduction to Regular Expressions, see these sites http://www.zend.com/zend/tut/tutorial-delin2.php regular-expressions or http://rezeau.org/eao/developpement/expandRegexpToString.htm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct answer matching a regular expression pattern&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not possible to give complete examples of the vast possibilities offered by this system, and the following are just some possibilities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 1.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Suppose your question is &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:In the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field you type this regular expression: &amp;quot;it’s blue, white(,| and) red/i&amp;quot;. This will match any of those four student answers:&lt;br /&gt;
*it’s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
*it’s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
*It’s blue, white, red&lt;br /&gt;
*It’s blue, white and red&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; By default a regular expression match is case sensitive; to make the match case insensitive you must add the /i parameter right at the end of your expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 2.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;What is blue, or red, or yellow?&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;(|it&#039;s )a colou?r&amp;quot;. This will match:&lt;br /&gt;
*a colour&lt;br /&gt;
*a color&lt;br /&gt;
*it&#039;s a colour&lt;br /&gt;
*it&#039;s a color&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; The beginning of this regular expression &amp;quot;(|it&#039;s )&amp;quot; will match either nothing or &amp;quot;it&#039;s &amp;quot; (i.e. &amp;quot;it&#039;s&amp;quot; followed by a space). The ? (question-mark) means: preceding character zero or one time; it is used here to match British English as well as US spelling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 3.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel a&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;[bcr]at&amp;quot;. This will match: &lt;br /&gt;
*bat&lt;br /&gt;
*cat&lt;br /&gt;
*rat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting missing required words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regular expressions alone cannot detect absent character strings, so you have to add a little code in your Answer field to take care of this. Any &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; which begins with a double hyphen will analyse the &#039;&#039;student’s answer&#039;&#039; to find out whether the following string is present or absent. If present, the analysis continues to the next question; if absent, the analysis stops and the relevant Response message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 4.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;What are the colors of the French flag?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; --.*blue.*/i&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;student answer:&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;it&#039;s red and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; The color of the sky is missing!&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Jump 2:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the &#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039; (dot character) stands for “any character” and the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039; (asterisk) means “preceding special character repeated any number of times”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; regular expression above means: check whether the character string “blue”, preceded by anything and followed by anything is &#039;&#039;absent&#039;&#039; from the student&#039;s answer. Please note that the use of the asterisk is different in the Simple analysis system and in the Regular Expressions system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 5.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;a&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;--[b|c|r]&amp;quot;. Response: &amp;quot;Your answer should start with one of these letters: &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;c&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;r&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Detecting unwanted (incorrect) words or character strings&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may want to detect, in the student&#039;s answer, the presence of one or several words which should be not be there (because they are wrong) and to single them out with a specific response. To do this, just start the &#039;&#039;expected answer&#039;&#039; in the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; field with a double plus sign (++).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 6.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; ++(yellow|black|orange|green|black|pink)/i&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;student answer:&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;it&#039;s blue, orange and white&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; One or more colors are wrong!&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Jump:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; this page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note.-&#039;&#039;&#039; If any of these (wrong) color names is detected in the student’s answer, then the negative feedback message (&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;) will be displayed &#039;&#039;and&#039;&#039; the wrong strings will be colored red (or the color of the &#039;&#039;.incorrect&#039;&#039; class will be used if it exists in a CSS stylesheet of your current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example 7.&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Question:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Name an animal whose name is made of 3 letters and the middle letter is the vowel a&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;++hat&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;You might wear one made of an animal&#039;s skin, but a hat can&#039;t be considered as an animal.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Escaping special characters=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to use characters which are part of the regular expressions set of special characters, you need to &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them (i.e. precede them with a backslash). E.g. if you want to accept the answer &amp;quot;My computer cost 1000$&amp;quot;, you must write the regular expression as &amp;quot;My computer cost 1000\$&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 The special characters which must be escaped are .^$*()[]+?|&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Order of the &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039;=====&lt;br /&gt;
Because the program tries to match the student&#039;s answer with the teacher&#039;s &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;in the order of the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; fields&#039;&#039;&#039;, the &#039;&#039;order&#039;&#039; of those &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039; is of the greatest importance. The best analysis system will be achieved by a careful combination of regular expressions and order of &#039;&#039;expected answers&#039;&#039;. Of course, any question programed with the Regular expressions system will have to be thoroughly tested by the teacher before being released in a Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====NOTE====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when - as a teacher - you &#039;&#039;preview&#039;&#039; a lesson, your attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against another list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists &amp;quot;Canada, Italy, Japan&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Ottawa, Rome, Tokyo&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical.&lt;br /&gt;
*For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists &amp;quot;Ant, Cow, Dog, Sparrow&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Insect, Mammal, Mammal, Bird&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.5}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 1.5.-&#039;&#039;&#039; When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Moodle 1.6.-&#039;&#039;&#039;When the student successfully matches the items, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct answer jump&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrong answer jump&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;. The question supports only 2 response (= feedback) messages: the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Correct response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; message is displayed if all matches are correct, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wrong response&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; message otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the &#039;&#039;Multichoice question&#039;&#039; where the choices are shown in a random order, the first list of items in a &#039;&#039;Matching question&#039;&#039; is not shuffled but shown in the same order as entered. This allows for &amp;quot;Ordered&amp;quot; questions to be constructed. Consider the question &amp;quot; Put the following into the order they were born, the earliest first&amp;quot; with the lists &amp;quot;1., 2., 3., 4.&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Longfellow, Lawrence, Lowell, Larkin&amp;quot;. The second list is shuffed before being used in the question, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately this question differs from the numerical quiz question and the numerical embedded question (Cloze) in a couple of ways. 3:4 in those questions means &amp;quot;3 plus or minus 4&amp;quot;, in other words from -1 to 7. The embedded question doesn&#039;t support interval boundaries. The numerical question, if imported in GIFT format, can use &amp;quot;3..4&amp;quot; as the interval from 3 to 4. Another difference is that those questions accept , as decimal in student answers, but the lesson numerical question doesn&#039;t.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions were introduced in Moodle version 1.5. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. They look similar to question pages. They have a title, content section, student choices and jumps that the student selects by their choice. There is no score for a student&#039;s choice.  Branch tables also have some special uses.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table can effectively divide the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Jumps special navigation page] which, by default, returns the student back to the preceding branch table. However like any other jump, the &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be set to anywhere in the lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)  Also branch tables can be used instead of question pages.  For example, a series of pages with information that continue to the next page, with the series ending with a question page about the content which was just covered.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the lesson setting &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables and you are not using custom scoring (where you enter a point value for each question) it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown pages (cards) in  random order.  Usually these are question pages. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a series of cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the Flash Card mode of presentation, setting the jumps is important. A correct answer jump should point to the Next Page, a wrong answer should stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson Flash Card mode is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. And Further extra text can be included with each question in the Flash Card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://download.moodle.org/docs/using_moodle/ch10_lessons.pdf Using Moodle Chapter 10: Lessons]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=External_database_enrolment&amp;diff=12130</id>
		<title>External database enrolment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=External_database_enrolment&amp;diff=12130"/>
		<updated>2006-06-19T15:40:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{stub}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Administrator]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Enrolment]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a external database (of nearly any kind) to control your enrolments. It is assumed your external database contains a field containing a course ID, and a field containing a user ID. These are compared against fields that you choose in the local course and user tables.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported data sources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
access&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ado&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mssql&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
borland_ibase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
csv&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
db2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
fbsql&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
firebird&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ibase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
informix72&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
informix&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mysql&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
mysqlt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oci805&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oci8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oci8po&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
odbc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
odbc_mssql&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
odbc_oracle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
oracle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
postgres64&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
postgres7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
postgres&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
proxy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sqlanywhere&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
sybase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
vfp&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Book_resource&amp;diff=4894</id>
		<title>Book resource</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Book_resource&amp;diff=4894"/>
		<updated>2006-02-07T04:48:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The book module makes it easy to create multi-page resources with a book-like format. This can be used to build complete book-like websites inside of your Moodle course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously created websites can be imported directly into the Book module.  Books can be printed entirely or by chapter.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Moodle_in_education&amp;diff=4586</id>
		<title>Moodle in education</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Moodle_in_education&amp;diff=4586"/>
		<updated>2006-02-04T18:26:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| width=85% align=center style=&amp;quot;background: #F8EABA; border: 1px solid #aaa;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-size: 90%; padding-right: 4px; padding-left: 4px;&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note for contributors:&#039;&#039;&#039; Design and/or style improvements to this page are welcome :-) Please add additional teacher documentation links to the See also section.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 15px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[mod/assignment/index|Assignments]] | [[mod/chat/index|Chats]] | [[mod/choice/index|Choices]] | [[mod/forum/index|Forums]] | [[mod/glossary/index|Glossaries]] | [[mod/hotpot/index|Hot Potatoes]] | [[mod/lesson/index|Lessons]] | [[mod/quiz/index|Quizzes]] | [[mod/scorm/index|SCORM]] | [[mod/survey/index|Surveys]] | [[mod/wiki/index|Wikis]] | [[mod/workshop/index|Workshops]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 15px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[mod/resource/index|Resources]]&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[course/mod/text|Text page]] | [[course/mod/html|Web page]] | [[course/mod/file|File or website link]] | [[course/mod/directory|Directory]] | [[course/mod/label|Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 10px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Blocks]]&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[Activities]] | [[Administration]] | [[Calendar]] | [[Courses]] | [[Course/Site Description]] | [[HTML]] | [[Latest News]] | [[Messages]] | [[Online Users]] | [[People]] | [[Quiz Results]] | [[Random Glossary Entry]] | [[Recent Activity]] | [[RSS feeds]] | [[Search Forums]] | [[Section Links]] | [[Upcoming Events]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 10px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Tools]]&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[Gradebook]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[course/view|The course homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Formatting options]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[HTML in Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle manuals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding resources and activities|Adding resources and activities to your course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Non-standard modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Non-standard blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Teaching FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Moodle_in_education&amp;diff=4585</id>
		<title>Moodle in education</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Moodle_in_education&amp;diff=4585"/>
		<updated>2006-02-04T18:26:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| width=85% align=center style=&amp;quot;background: #F8EABA; border: 1px solid #aaa;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;font-size: 90%; padding-right: 4px; padding-left: 4px;&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note for contributors:&#039;&#039;&#039; Design and/or style improvements to this page are welcome :-) Please add additional teacher documentation links to the See also section.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 15px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4;&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[mod/assignment/index|Assignments]] | [[mod/chat/index|Chats]] | [[mod/choice/index|Choices]] | [[mod/forum/index|Forums]] | [[mod/glossary/index|Glossaries]] | [[mod/hotpot/index|Hot Potatoes]] | [[mod/lesson/index|Lessons]] | [[mod/quiz/index|Quizzes]] | [[mod/scorm/index|SCORM]] | [[mod/survey/index|Surveys]] | [[mod/wiki/index|Wikis]] | [[mod/workshop/index|Workshops]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 15px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[mod/resource/index|Resources]]&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[course/mod/text|Text page]] | [[course/mod/html|Web page]] | [[course/mod/file|File or website link]] | [[course/mod/directory|Directory]] | [[course/mod/label|Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 10px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Blocks]]&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[Activities]] | [[Administration]] | [[Calendar]] | [[Courses]] | [[Course/Site Description]] | [[HTML]] | [[Latest News]] | [[Messages]] | [[Online Users]] | [[People]] | [[Quiz Results]] | [[Random Glossary Entry]] | [[Recent Activity]] | [[RSS feeds]] | [[Search Forums]] | [[Section Links]] | [[Upcoming Events]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellpadding=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaa; background: #f9f9f9; padding: 5px; margin: 5px 0 10px 0; width: 100%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;padding: 0 5px 0 5px; background:#e4e4e4&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; | &amp;lt;h2 style=&amp;quot;border: 0; margin: 0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Tools]]&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;font-size: 100%;&amp;quot; | [[Gradebook]] | &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[course/view|The course homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Formatting options]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[HTML in Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle manuals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Adding resources and activities|Adding resources and activities to your course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Non-standard modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Non-standard blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Teaching FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4102</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4102"/>
		<updated>2006-01-26T18:09:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* General information about the lesson and its methodology */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in an interesting and flexible way. It consists of a number of pages. Each page normally ends with a question and a number of possible answers. Depending on the student&#039;s choice of answer they either progress to the next page or are taken back to a previous page. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex, depending largely on the structure of the material being presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Each part is re-enforced by requiring the students to answer questions. The students proceed through the material only by answering the questions correctly. Wrong answers are &amp;quot;penalised&amp;quot; either by showing the same material again or going even further back in the lesson, even to the beginning of the lesson!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each page can have a question at the end, and can lead to any other page. This module can create a series of pages which can be presented in a linear fashion, like a slide show, or in a non-linear, branching manner, or a combination of the two.  It can be graded, with questions, or ungraded and used simply as a resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two basic modes: a flash card mode and a presentation mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lesson includes many features to make cheating more difficult and lesson presentation more interesting through question clustering, password protection, and time limits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By mixing content with questions, lesson enables you to implement the Practice Principle of eLearning (see Clark and Mayer, 2004), where practice is integrated with instructional material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is made up of pages. Normally each page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it&#039;s the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses. Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) The responses are usually short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. But it&#039;s probably best not to try and second guess the student too much, always remember KISS (Keep it simple stupid!). In fact, responses can be left blank. The module then shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a question and a set of answers. This is allowed, the students are simply shown a Continue link and are shown the next page in the lesson. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers. In the current version of the Lesson module the answers are not flagged as being correct or wrong. Rather correct answers are ones which take the student further forward in the lesson and wrong answers take the student either backwards or they just stand still, showing the same page again. In the last case the student will, if sensible, choose another answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The definition of further forward in the lesson or backwards in the lesson follows from the logical ordering of the pages. The teacher sees the lesson as a list of pages from the start of the lesson to its end. If the pages are not in the best order then the teacher can easily move the pages so that an optimum order is achieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus answers which jump to the Next Page are by this definition correct and answers with jump to the Same Page are wrong. A page which has two answers with both jumps to the Next Page has two correct answers. An answer which jumps to the End of Lesson is again, by definition, correct. The End of lesson is not an actual page, it is a logical position after the last (logical) page. A student completes a lesson by reaching that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, an answer which takes the student to the first page of the lesson is a wrong answer. An answer which skips two pages (in the logical order) is a correct answer. An answer which goes back one page (again in the logical order) is a wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a page is added, the jumps are set, by default, as follows. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. If the jumps are not changed this means that the first answer is correct and the other answers are wrong. Of course, if this is not the required behaviour then the jumps can be changed either before the page is added or they can be easily altered by editing the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given this concept of correct and wrong answers it follows that we can grade a student&#039;s performance when they complete a lesson. How this is done is considered below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It&#039;s the number of correct answers divided by the number of pages seen. Remember each page normally ends with a question so the number of pages seen equates with the number of questions asked. So the grade is really the number of correct answers divided by the number of questions asked. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter the text of the first page and that page&#039;s set of answers and responses. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages or editing that page. When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher has the addition option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is envisioned that a lesson will normally cover a limited topic in possibly five to ten pages. And a course might have possibly a larger number of lessons. The module is not designed to handle lessons which have a large number of pages, such &amp;quot;lessons&amp;quot; should be broken down into more manageable sections. The Lessons link (in the page header) shows all the lessons within a course and provides both teachers and students with a unifying framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown some information (optional) and a question in basically a random order. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a set of Cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Lesson module the cards are pages. Correct answers jump to the Next Page, wrong answers stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In fact, this type of lesson is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. Further extra text can be included with each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is prompted for a short piece of text. This is checked against one or more answers. Answers can be either correct or wrong. Each answer can optionally have a response. If no response is entered for an answer then the default response &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered does not match any of the answers then the answer is wrong and the student is shown the default wrong response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the comparisons ignore the case of the text. There is an option to make the comparisons case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when a teacher looks at a lesson their attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions are much more interesting than the last type of question. They can make quite powerful and flexible questions. They consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against other list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists Japan, Canada, Italy and Tokyo, Ottawa, Rome. It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical. For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists Sparrow, Cow, Ant, Dog and Bird, Animal, Insect, Animal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions are a new feature in Lesson. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table effectively divides the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a special page which, by default, returns the student back to the preceding branch table. (The &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be changed, if required, by editing the page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables and you are not using custom scoring (where you enter a point value for each question) it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4101</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4101"/>
		<updated>2006-01-26T18:07:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Pages, questions, answers and responses */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in an interesting and flexible way. It consists of a number of pages. Each page normally ends with a question and a number of possible answers. Depending on the student&#039;s choice of answer they either progress to the next page or are taken back to a previous page. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex, depending largely on the structure of the material being presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Each part is re-enforced by requiring the students to answer questions. The students proceed through the material only by answering the questions correctly. Wrong answers are &amp;quot;penalised&amp;quot; either by showing the same material again or going even further back in the lesson, even to the beginning of the lesson!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is made up of pages. Normally each page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it&#039;s the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses. Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) The responses are usually short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. But it&#039;s probably best not to try and second guess the student too much, always remember KISS (Keep it simple stupid!). In fact, responses can be left blank. The module then shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a question and a set of answers. This is allowed, the students are simply shown a Continue link and are shown the next page in the lesson. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers. In the current version of the Lesson module the answers are not flagged as being correct or wrong. Rather correct answers are ones which take the student further forward in the lesson and wrong answers take the student either backwards or they just stand still, showing the same page again. In the last case the student will, if sensible, choose another answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The definition of further forward in the lesson or backwards in the lesson follows from the logical ordering of the pages. The teacher sees the lesson as a list of pages from the start of the lesson to its end. If the pages are not in the best order then the teacher can easily move the pages so that an optimum order is achieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus answers which jump to the Next Page are by this definition correct and answers with jump to the Same Page are wrong. A page which has two answers with both jumps to the Next Page has two correct answers. An answer which jumps to the End of Lesson is again, by definition, correct. The End of lesson is not an actual page, it is a logical position after the last (logical) page. A student completes a lesson by reaching that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, an answer which takes the student to the first page of the lesson is a wrong answer. An answer which skips two pages (in the logical order) is a correct answer. An answer which goes back one page (again in the logical order) is a wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a page is added, the jumps are set, by default, as follows. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. If the jumps are not changed this means that the first answer is correct and the other answers are wrong. Of course, if this is not the required behaviour then the jumps can be changed either before the page is added or they can be easily altered by editing the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given this concept of correct and wrong answers it follows that we can grade a student&#039;s performance when they complete a lesson. How this is done is considered below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It&#039;s the number of correct answers divided by the number of pages seen. Remember each page normally ends with a question so the number of pages seen equates with the number of questions asked. So the grade is really the number of correct answers divided by the number of questions asked. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter the text of the first page and that page&#039;s set of answers and responses. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages or editing that page. When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher has the addition option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is envisioned that a lesson will normally cover a limited topic in possibly five to ten pages. And a course might have possibly a larger number of lessons. The module is not designed to handle lessons which have a large number of pages, such &amp;quot;lessons&amp;quot; should be broken down into more manageable sections. The Lessons link (in the page header) shows all the lessons within a course and provides both teachers and students with a unifying framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown some information (optional) and a question in basically a random order. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a set of Cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Lesson module the cards are pages. Correct answers jump to the Next Page, wrong answers stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In fact, this type of lesson is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. Further extra text can be included with each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is prompted for a short piece of text. This is checked against one or more answers. Answers can be either correct or wrong. Each answer can optionally have a response. If no response is entered for an answer then the default response &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered does not match any of the answers then the answer is wrong and the student is shown the default wrong response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the comparisons ignore the case of the text. There is an option to make the comparisons case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when a teacher looks at a lesson their attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions are much more interesting than the last type of question. They can make quite powerful and flexible questions. They consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against other list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists Japan, Canada, Italy and Tokyo, Ottawa, Rome. It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical. For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists Sparrow, Cow, Ant, Dog and Bird, Animal, Insect, Animal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions are a new feature in Lesson. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table effectively divides the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a special page which, by default, returns the student back to the preceding branch table. (The &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be changed, if required, by editing the page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables and you are not using custom scoring (where you enter a point value for each question) it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4100</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4100"/>
		<updated>2006-01-26T18:05:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Branches and branch tables */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in an interesting and flexible way. It consists of a number of pages. Each page normally ends with a question and a number of possible answers. Depending on the student&#039;s choice of answer they either progress to the next page or are taken back to a previous page. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex, depending largely on the structure of the material being presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Each part is re-enforced by requiring the students to answer questions. The students proceed through the material only by answering the questions correctly. Wrong answers are &amp;quot;penalised&amp;quot; either by showing the same material again or going even further back in the lesson, even to the beginning of the lesson!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So a lesson is made up of pages. Normally each page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it&#039;s the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses. Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) The responses are usually short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. But it&#039;s probably best not to try and second guess the student too much, always remember KISS (Keep it simple stupid!). In fact, responses can be left blank. The module then shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a question and a set of answers. This is allowed, the students are simply shown a Continue link and are shown the next page in the lesson. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers. In the current version of the Lesson module the answers are not flagged as being correct or wrong. Rather correct answers are ones which take the student further forward in the lesson and wrong answers take the student either backwards or they just stand still, showing the same page again. In the last case the student will, if sensible, choose another answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The definition of further forward in the lesson or backwards in the lesson follows from the logical ordering of the pages. The teacher sees the lesson as a list of pages from the start of the lesson to its end. If the pages are not in the best order then the teacher can easily move the pages so that an optimum order is achieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus answers which jump to the Next Page are by this definition correct and answers with jump to the Same Page are wrong. A page which has two answers with both jumps to the Next Page has two correct answers. An answer which jumps to the End of Lesson is again, by definition, correct. The End of lesson is not an actual page, it is a logical position after the last (logical) page. A student completes a lesson by reaching that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, an answer which takes the student to the first page of the lesson is a wrong answer. An answer which skips two pages (in the logical order) is a correct answer. An answer which goes back one page (again in the logical order) is a wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a page is added, the jumps are set, by default, as follows. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. If the jumps are not changed this means that the first answer is correct and the other answers are wrong. Of course, if this is not the required behaviour then the jumps can be changed either before the page is added or they can be easily altered by editing the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given this concept of correct and wrong answers it follows that we can grade a student&#039;s performance when they complete a lesson. How this is done is considered below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It&#039;s the number of correct answers divided by the number of pages seen. Remember each page normally ends with a question so the number of pages seen equates with the number of questions asked. So the grade is really the number of correct answers divided by the number of questions asked. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter the text of the first page and that page&#039;s set of answers and responses. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages or editing that page. When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher has the addition option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is envisioned that a lesson will normally cover a limited topic in possibly five to ten pages. And a course might have possibly a larger number of lessons. The module is not designed to handle lessons which have a large number of pages, such &amp;quot;lessons&amp;quot; should be broken down into more manageable sections. The Lessons link (in the page header) shows all the lessons within a course and provides both teachers and students with a unifying framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown some information (optional) and a question in basically a random order. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a set of Cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Lesson module the cards are pages. Correct answers jump to the Next Page, wrong answers stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In fact, this type of lesson is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. Further extra text can be included with each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is prompted for a short piece of text. This is checked against one or more answers. Answers can be either correct or wrong. Each answer can optionally have a response. If no response is entered for an answer then the default response &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered does not match any of the answers then the answer is wrong and the student is shown the default wrong response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the comparisons ignore the case of the text. There is an option to make the comparisons case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when a teacher looks at a lesson their attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions are much more interesting than the last type of question. They can make quite powerful and flexible questions. They consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against other list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists Japan, Canada, Italy and Tokyo, Ottawa, Rome. It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical. For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists Sparrow, Cow, Ant, Dog and Bird, Animal, Insect, Animal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions are a new feature in Lesson. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table effectively divides the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a special page which, by default, returns the student back to the preceding branch table. (The &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be changed, if required, by editing the page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables and you are not using custom scoring (where you enter a point value for each question) it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4099</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/39/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=4099"/>
		<updated>2006-01-26T18:03:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelp: /* Types of questions available within a lesson */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;lesson&#039;&#039;&#039; delivers content in an interesting and flexible way. It consists of a number of pages. Each page normally ends with a question and a number of possible answers. Depending on the student&#039;s choice of answer they either progress to the next page or are taken back to a previous page. Navigation through the lesson can be straight forward or complex, depending largely on the structure of the material being presented.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is used when it is necessary to tell the students some information about the topic being taught. The topic is broken into small chunks and shown to the student bit by bit. Each part is re-enforced by requiring the students to answer questions. The students proceed through the material only by answering the questions correctly. Wrong answers are &amp;quot;penalised&amp;quot; either by showing the same material again or going even further back in the lesson, even to the beginning of the lesson!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the lesson these chunks are called Pages. The length of each page is arbitrary but normally it should not be more than the amount that comfortably fits on a screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So a lesson is made up of pages. Normally each page gives some information and then finishes with a question. The question can be easy or hard, depending on the audience. It should be directly related to the material covered in the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attached to each page is a set of answers to the question. Usually there is one correct answer and a small number of wrong answers. This type of question is called a multiple choice question. It&#039;s a common type of question and it&#039;s the default question type in the Lesson module. The number of answers can vary from page to page. Some pages can have one correct answer and three wrong answers, other pages may ask questions where there are three answers or even two answers (for example true or false, or just yes or no).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a limit to the number of answers. This maximum is one of the parameters of the Lesson module, set initially when you add a Lesson. However, this maximum limit is flexible and can be changed at any time. The limit just determines the number of boxes you see when adding or editing pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along with the answers there is a set of responses. Each answer has its own response. Once the student has chosen their answer that response is displayed before the &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; page is displayed. (The word &amp;quot;new&amp;quot; is in quotes because the student may well be shown the same page again if they choose the wrong answer.) The responses are usually short, a simple &amp;quot;That&#039;s right&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s wrong&amp;quot; might be sufficient. They could, however, explain why the answer which seemed right is actually wrong. But it&#039;s probably best not to try and second guess the student too much, always remember KISS (Keep it simple stupid!). In fact, responses can be left blank. The module then shows the student a standard &amp;quot;That&#039;s the correct answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the wrong answer&amp;quot; type of response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be circumstances when the teacher does not want to end a page with a question and a set of answers. This is allowed, the students are simply shown a Continue link and are shown the next page in the lesson. What exactly is meant by &amp;quot;the next page&amp;quot; is explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Logical order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material. Mostly the teacher will want to present the material in a way which is most easily understood and which builds in a logical and progressive way. In the Lesson module, this order is called the Logical Order and this is is how the pages are usually shown to the teacher. The teacher sees all the pages on one long screen with the first page at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add pages to any position within the set. This logical ordering of pages is also the default Navigation Order. The latter is order in which the students see the pages. In the default navigation order, correct answers show the next page (in the Logical order) and incorrect answers show the same page again, that is the student is asked the same question again. This default navigation order is possibly OK for the majority of lessons. However, it is possible to change the &amp;quot;Jump&amp;quot; associated with any answer so that a more complicated path through the lesson can be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These jumps can be divided into two types - Relative Jumps and Absolute Jumps. The default navigation using the relative jumps Next Page and Same Page, the destination of the Next Page jump is the next page in the logical order of the lesson. Absolute jumps specify the actual page to show next by specifying of the page&#039;s Title. Thus a lesson can have &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using Check Question button at the end of each page or by using the Check Navigation link at the very end of the lesson. The  Check button &amp;quot;launches&amp;quot; the lesson at that page. The Check Navigation links starts lesson the lesson at the first page, the way a student would see the lesson initially.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One use of jumps which don&#039;t follow the standard pattern is allowing a question to have more than one correct answer. More of that below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct answer and several wrong answers. In the current version of the Lesson module the answers are not flagged as being correct or wrong. Rather correct answers are ones which take the student further forward in the lesson and wrong answers take the student either backwards or they just stand still, showing the same page again. In the last case the student will, if sensible, choose another answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The definition of further forward in the lesson or backwards in the lesson follows from the logical ordering of the pages. The teacher sees the lesson as a list of pages from the start of the lesson to its end. If the pages are not in the best order then the teacher can easily move the pages so that an optimum order is achieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thus answers which jump to the Next Page are by this definition correct and answers with jump to the Same Page are wrong. A page which has two answers with both jumps to the Next Page has two correct answers. An answer which jumps to the End of Lesson is again, by definition, correct. The End of lesson is not an actual page, it is a logical position after the last (logical) page. A student completes a lesson by reaching that point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, an answer which takes the student to the first page of the lesson is a wrong answer. An answer which skips two pages (in the logical order) is a correct answer. An answer which goes back one page (again in the logical order) is a wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a page is added, the jumps are set, by default, as follows. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. If the jumps are not changed this means that the first answer is correct and the other answers are wrong. Of course, if this is not the required behaviour then the jumps can be changed either before the page is added or they can be easily altered by editing the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Given this concept of correct and wrong answers it follows that we can grade a student&#039;s performance when they complete a lesson. How this is done is considered below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above we introduced the concept of correct answers and wrong answers. This lends itself to the giving students a grade when they have completed a lesson. In order to keep the method of grading reasonably transparent a relatively simple formula is used. It&#039;s the number of correct answers divided by the number of pages seen. Remember each page normally ends with a question so the number of pages seen equates with the number of questions asked. So the grade is really the number of correct answers divided by the number of questions asked. This number is then simply scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A lesson is graded when the student reaches the End of Lesson. This point is usually reached by answering the question on the last (logical) page correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;. If a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in other sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a way giving a grade to a lesson is both a blessing and a curse. The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the answers correct is the sole goal. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although lessons do have grades, they should not be considered as assignments which lead to meaningful &amp;quot;marks&amp;quot;. They are most useful as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds. For example &amp;quot;You must get an average of at least 80% overall in the eight lessons in this course before you can take the XYZ assignment.&amp;quot; Lessons are mainly used to get across chunks of knowledge. Testing that knowledge is something else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option. That is the subject of the next part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default lessons allow re-takes. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance (by viewing their complete activity page). The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best of all the attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the Grades page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson further attempts are allowed (although there is no benefit to their grade if the best grade is being used). They may well be exploring the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson and may well come up with improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In exceptional circumstances the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher is required to enter the text of the first page and that page&#039;s set of answers and responses. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages or editing that page. When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher has the addition option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. Thus once the lesson is under construction the teacher can add pages, edit pages, remove pages and move pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is envisioned that a lesson will normally cover a limited topic in possibly five to ten pages. And a course might have possibly a larger number of lessons. The module is not designed to handle lessons which have a large number of pages, such &amp;quot;lessons&amp;quot; should be broken down into more manageable sections. The Lessons link (in the page header) shows all the lessons within a course and provides both teachers and students with a unifying framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment. The student is shown some information (optional) and a question in basically a random order. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a set of Cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Lesson module the cards are pages. Correct answers jump to the Next Page, wrong answers stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behaviour. The option &amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot; never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the &amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot; parameter when setting up the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In fact, this type of lesson is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. Further extra text can be included with each question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice, multiple answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is variant of multiple choice questions called multiple choice multiple answer questions. These require the student to select all the correct answers from the set of answers. The question may or may not tell the student how many correct answers there are. For example &amp;quot;Which of the following were US Presidents?&amp;quot; does not, while &amp;quot;Select the two US presidents from the following list.&amp;quot; does. The actual number of correct answers can be from one up to the number of choices. (A multiple choice multiple answer question with one correct answer is different from a multiple choice question as the former allows the student the possibility of choosing more than one answer while the latter does not.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again the correct answers are flagged using forward jumps, the wrong answers by same page or backward jumps. When there is more than one correct answer the jumps should all go to the same page, similarly with the wrong answers. If that is not the case a warning is given on the teacher&#039;s view of the lesson. The correct response, if required, should be given on the first correct answer and the wrong response, if required, should be on the first wrong answer. Responses on the other answers are ignored (without warning).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g. Which of the following are mammals?&lt;br /&gt;
- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
- An ant&lt;br /&gt;
- A buttercup&lt;br /&gt;
- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is prompted for a short piece of text. This is checked against one or more answers. Answers can be either correct or wrong. Each answer can optionally have a response. If no response is entered for an answer then the default response &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Correct Answer&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;That&#039;s the Wrong Answer&amp;quot; is shown to the student. If the text entered does not match any of the answers then the answer is wrong and the student is shown the default wrong response.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the comparisons ignore the case of the text. There is an option to make the comparisons case sensitive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a fundamental problem with this type of question. If you ask a question like &amp;quot;Who wrote Elegy written in a Country Churchyard?&amp;quot; as a Short Answer question it&#039;s fine for the students who know the answer. But how about those who do not? To avoid those students getting stuck in a loop the Lesson module has a &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; parameter which sets an upper limit on the number of times a student can attempt a question. The default value is 5 times. (This can be reduced to 1 if you wanted students to have only one attempt at each question.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a slight complication here . The &amp;quot;Maximum number of Attempts&amp;quot; mechanism relies on looking at the record of attempts. That is fine for students as their attempts are all recorded. However, when a teacher looks at a lesson their attempts are not recorded. (The attempts are used to calculate grades and as teachers aren&#039;t interested in their own grades...) So teachers are not subject to the number of answers limit. But they should know the answers, shouldn&#039;t they!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question is a special case of the multiple choice question.The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions are much more interesting than the last type of question. They can make quite powerful and flexible questions. They consist of a list of names or statements which must be correctly matched against other list of names or statements. For example &amp;quot;Match the Capital with the Country&amp;quot; with the two lists Japan, Canada, Italy and Tokyo, Ottawa, Rome. It is possible to have repeated entries in one of the lists but care should be taken to make the repeats identical. For example &amp;quot;Identify the type of these creatures&amp;quot; with the lists Sparrow, Cow, Ant, Dog and Bird, Animal, Insect, Animal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating this type of question the items for the first list go into the Answer boxes and items for the second list go into the Response boxes. Once created a more sensible labelling scheme is shown. When the student successfully matches the items the jump on the first answer is used. An unsuccessful answer jumps to the page on the second answer. The question does not support custom responses, the student is told how many matches are correct or if all the matches are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot; with the answer 4 given a forward jump. However, it is better to specify a range because the internal rounding of numerical values can make single numeric comparisons rather hit or miss. Thus, if the question were &amp;quot;What is 10 divided by 3&amp;quot; it would be necessary to give the answer as Minimum:Maximum, that is two values separated by a colon. Thus if 3.33:3.34 is given as the acceptable range for the answer, then the answers 3.33, 3.333, 3.3333... would all be taken as correct answers. &amp;quot;Wrong&amp;quot; answers would include 3.3 (less than the minimum) and 3.4 (greater than the maximum).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More than one correct answer is allowed and the answers can be either single or pair of values. Note that the order in which the answers are tested is Answer 1, Answer 2... so some care needs to taken if the desired response is to appear. For example the question &amp;quot;When was Larkin born?&amp;quot; could have the single value of 1922, the exact answer, and the pair of values 1920:1929, the 20&#039;s, as the less exact answer.The order in which these values should be tested is, obviously, 1922 then 1920:1929. The first answer might have the response &amp;quot;That&#039;s exactly right&amp;quot; while the other answer&#039;s response might be &amp;quot;That&#039;s close, you&#039;ve got the right decade, it is was actually 1922.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wrong answers can be given but depending on their actual range, care should be taken to place them after the correct answers. For example in adding the wrong answer 3:4 to the &amp;quot;10 divided by 3&amp;quot; question it needs to come after the correct answer. That is the answers are ordered 3.33:3.34 (the &amp;quot;correct&amp;quot; answer) then 3:4 (the &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; answer, but not wildly wrong answer!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions are a new feature in Lesson. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To grade lesson essay questions, first click on the name of the lesson in your course page. If there are essay questions to be graded, there will be a link saying &amp;quot;Grade essay questions&amp;quot; (see red arrow). Click that link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a screen showing you how many ungraded essay questions there are. Ungraded essay questions will be in listed in red. Click the link for the essay you wish to grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The essay grading screen shows the title of the question, the student&#039;s essay response, and a place you can write optional comments and give the essay a score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Submit grade button to record your score and comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded questions will be displayed in green.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the process to finish grading. Click the &amp;quot;Email graded essays&amp;quot; link to email your responses to your students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into chapters or sections.  These sections within a lesson are called branches in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links to other pages in the lesson. Typically a lesson may start with a branch table which acts as a Table of Contents. Each link in a branch table has two components, a description and the title of the page to jump to. A branch table effectively divides the lesson into a number of branches (or sections). Each branch can contain a number of pages (probably all related to the same topic).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The end of a branch is usually marked by an End of Branch page. This is a special page which, by default, returns the student back to the preceding branch table. (The &amp;quot;return&amp;quot; jump in an End of Branch page can be changed, if required, by editing the page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There can be more than one branch table in a lesson. For example, a lesson might usefully be structured so that specialist points are sub-branches within the main subject branches. (Thus the name used is Branch Table rather than Table of Contents page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table is set by the &amp;quot;Number of Answers/Branches&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the Update the Lesson button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to give students a means of ending the lesson. This might be done by including an &amp;quot;End Lesson&amp;quot; link in the main branch table. This jumps to the (imaginary) End of Lesson page. Another option is for the last branch in the lesson (here &amp;quot;last&amp;quot; is used in the logical ordering sense) to simply continue to the end of the lesson, that is, it is not terminated by an End of Branch page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a lesson includes one or more branch tables it is advisable to set the &amp;quot;Minimum number of Questions&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable value. This sets a lower limit on the number of pages seen when the grade is calculated. Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further, when a branch table is present a student has the opportunity of re-visiting the same branch more than once. However, the grade is calculated using the number of unique questions answered. So repeatedly answering the same set of questions does not increase the grade. (In fact, the reverse is true, it lowers the grade as the count of the number of pages seen is used in the denominator when calculating grades does include repeats.) In order to give students a fair idea of their progress in the lesson, they are shown details of how many questions they are answered correctly, number of pages seen, and their current grade on every branch table page. (This is one other thing teachers don&#039;t get to see - sorry!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelp</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>